Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1 System Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Conference System
  5. MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1
  6. System programming manual

Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1 System Programming Manual

Release 6.1
Hide thumbs Also See for MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1:
1
2
Table Of Contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Installation Manual
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
Release 6.1

System Programming

®
555-661-111
Comcode 108289471
Issue 1
August 1998

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1

  • Page 1: System Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND ® Communications System Release 6.1 System Programming 555-661-111 Comcode 108289471 Issue 1 August 1998...
  • Page 2 Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unau- thorized use.

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Contents Page iii Contents About This Book Intended Audience How to Use This Book Terms and Conventions Used Security xviii Related Documents How to Comment on This Book Programming Basics 1–1 Introduction to System Programming...
  • Page 4 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Contents Page iv Programming Procedures 3–1 Basic System Operating Conditions 3–2 System Renumbering 3–20 System Operator Positions 3–42 Lines and Trunks 3–48 Uniform Dial Plan Facilities 3–100 DS1 Facilities 3–105...
  • Page 5 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Contents Page v Customer Support Information A–1 Support Telephone Number A–1 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Electromagnetic Interference Information A–1 Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information A–2 FCC Notification and Repair Information A–2...
  • Page 6 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Contents Page vi Button Diagrams E–1 Sample Reports F–1 System Information Report F–6 Dial Plan Report F–8 Label Information Report F–11 Tie Trunk Information Report F–12 DID Trunk Information Report F–13 GS/LS Trunk Information Report...
  • Page 7 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Contents Page vii General System Programming Sequence G–1 Basic System Operating Conditions G–2 System Renumbering G–2 Identify System Operator Positions G–3 Lines and Trunks G–3 Complex Lines G–4 Telephones G–4...
  • Page 8 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Contents Page viii...
  • Page 9 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Figures Page ix Figures Programming Basics 1–1 MLX-20L Telephone with Direct Station Selector (DSS) 1–4 1–2 Display Buttons and Main Menu 1–7 1–3 Console Overlay 1–9 1–4 Selecting a Block of Lines/Trunks 1–9...

  • Page 10: E Button Diagrams

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Figures Page x Button Diagrams E–1 MLX-20L and MLX-28D Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode) E–1 E–2 MLX-16DP Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode) E–2 E–3 MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode) E–2 E–4...
  • Page 11 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Tables Page xi Tables Programming Basics 1–1 MLX-20L Console Components 1–5 1–2 Direct Station Selector (DSS) Components 1–6 1–3 Fixed Display Buttons 1–7 1–4 Screen Keys 1–20 1–5 System Programming Menu Options...

  • Page 12: C Led Displays

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Tables Page xii 3–6 Programming Codes for Assigning Buttons 3–282 3–7 Other Data Programming Procedures 3–618 3–8 Memory Card Formatting Messages 3–628 Centralized Telephone Programming 4–1 Telephone Programming Codes 4–7 4–2...

  • Page 13: Important Safety Instructions

    Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.

  • Page 14: Save These Instructions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Page xiv The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary ground. Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

  • Page 15: August

    “Related Documents,” later in this section, provides a complete list of system documentation together with ordering information. In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline at 1 800 628-2888 (consultation charges may apply), or call your Lucent Technologies representative if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.

  • Page 16: Terms And Conventions Used

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Page xvi Terms and Conventions Used The terms described here are used in preference to other, equally acceptable terms for describing communications systems. Lines, Trunks, and Facilities Facility is a general term that designates a communications path between a telephone system and the telephone company central office.
  • Page 17 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 About This Book Terms and Conventions Used Page xvii Typographical Conventions Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented: Example Purpose...

  • Page 18: Security

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 About This Book Security Page xviii Security Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent unauthorized users from abusing the system. You should assign passwords wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer people.

  • Page 19: Related Documents

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 About This Book Related Documents Page xix Related Documents The documents listed below are part of the MERLIN LEGEND documentation set. Within the continental United States, these can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center by calling 1 800 457-1235.

  • Page 20: How To Comment On This Book

    If the feedback form is missing, write directly to: Documentation Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W226 Basking Ridge, NJ 07920...

  • Page 21: Programming Basics

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Page 1-1 Programming Basics This chapter presents the information you need to master before you begin the programming procedures covered in Chapter 3, “Programming Procedures.” It covers the following subjects: An introduction to system programming basics How to use the system programming console...

  • Page 22: Introduction To System Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Page 1-2 Introduction to System Programming The communications system offers easy-to-use, menu-driven software for system programming. After your system is installed, use this software to accommodate your company’s changing needs for such enhancements and modifications as upgraded lines, additional modules, and new extension programming.
  • Page 23 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Introduction to System Programming Page 1-3 Types of Programming Listed below are the three types of programming available for the communications system. System Programming. This type of programming enables the system manager to program features that affect all or most system users, and requires one of the following: —...

  • Page 24: System Programming Console

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-4 System Programming Console The system programming console is an MLX-20L telephone connected to the system programming jack. When you begin system programming on a new system for the first time, the console must be connected to the first jack on the first 008 MLX module or 408 GS/LS-MLX module (Release 2.0 and later versions).

  • Page 25: Mlx-20L Console Components

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-5 Console Components Table 1–1 Table 1–2 provide descriptions of the components that make up the MLX-20L Console and the Direct Station Selector (DSS). Refer to Figure 1–1 for the location of the components.

  • Page 26: Direct Station Selector (Dss) Components

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-6 Table 1–2. Direct Station Selector (DSS) Components Component Function Covers Removable plastic covers to protect the designation cards. The top cover protects the 50 DSS button labels.

  • Page 27: Display Buttons And Main Menu

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-7 Console Buttons Use the 14 buttons located on either side of the MLX-20L console display area for system programming. These buttons are arranged in two columns of seven buttons, as shown in Figure 1–2.

  • Page 28: Console Overlay

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-8 Unlabeled Display Buttons Use the five unlabeled display buttons on each side of the screen to select commands, options, or items on the screen. The functions of these buttons vary, based on the option you select.

  • Page 29: Selecting A Block Of Lines/Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-9 Line 1 Line 21 Line 14 Line 34 / 25 / 30 5 25 45 65 1O 30 50 70 15 35 55 75 20 40 60 80 14 / 34...
  • Page 30 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics System Programming Console Page 1-10 Console and DSS Lights The red and green lights (LEDs) next to each of the 20 line buttons on the MLX-20L console show the status of the line/trunk options.

  • Page 31: Programming Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-11 Programming Procedures The programming procedures provide step-by-step instructions for programming the communications system. This section details how to make the best use of the programming procedures.

  • Page 32: Information Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-12 Programming Screens There are three types of system programming screens: Information screens, to view what is currently programmed on the system. Menu selection screens, to select options from a menu.

  • Page 33: Data Entry Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-13 A menu selection screen prompts you to select one of the available options. The screen title is the first line on all screens. The second line contains a system prompt or instruction.

  • Page 34: Inspect Example

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-14 Verifying Data Entry You can use the Inspect feature to view the entries you save. An example of how to use the Inspect feature begins with Figure 1–8.
  • Page 35 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-15 Using the Programming Procedures This section contains specific information about how to make the best use of the programming procedures. Make certain that you read and understand the information presented here before you begin any system programming procedures.
  • Page 36 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-16 Console/Display Instructions Header In most cases, the screen shown in the console display area contains the results of the previous step. A step with no screen indicates that you should look at the preceding step.
  • Page 37 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-17 Branching Many of the procedures contain features that have multiple programming options, while other procedures show more than one way to program a particular feature. To accommodate both of these programming methods, the procedures use branching.
  • Page 38 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-18 The first branch procedure from sample Step 3 is shown below. AT&T Toll Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify a service. xx = number entered in Step 2 Press the button or function key next to your selection.
  • Page 39 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-19 Single or Block Items Branching is also used when you can select between programming a single item or a block of items, such as a single line or a block of lines, as shown in sample Step 5 below.

  • Page 40: Screen Keys

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-20 Saving Entries and Moving among Screens At the bottom of each screen one or more screen keys may appear representing functions that allow you to change your entry, save your entry, or return to a previous screen.
  • Page 41 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-21 Table 1–4. Screen Keys (Continued) Display PC Key Function Program sequentially numbered items. If you are programming a group of sequentially numbered extensions, lines, or trunks, you may have the option to select on the PC).
  • Page 42 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-22 Using Enter Pressing to save your entry produces one of the following results: The next screen in the procedure appears. The screen does not change and you can enter another extension or line/trunk.
  • Page 43 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-23 Using Next When you are programming a feature that can apply to a sequence of extensions, lines/trunks, or groups, the screen key appears on the console display.
  • Page 44 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-24 System Programming Hierarchy The following table shows all of the options that are available under each of the System Programming main menu options displayed on the system programming console.
  • Page 45 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-25 Description Page SysRenumber Default Numbering Default extension numbering plans 3–20 * 2-Digit * 3-Digit * SetUp Space Single Single extension renumbering 3–26 * Lines Lines/Trunks...
  • Page 46 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-26 Description Page Operator Continued * Call Types QCC Operator to Receive Call Types 3–379 - Dial 0 Dial 0 Calls - Priority - Operator - Follow/Frwd...
  • Page 47 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-27 Description Page LinesTrunks Lines/Trunks options LS/GS/DS1 Loop-start, ground-start or DS1 options * (DS1) DS1 options - Type Type of DS1 facility 3–105 - T1 - GroundStart...
  • Page 48 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-28 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued -PRI Primary Rate Interface 3–183 - Frame Format - D4 Compatible - Extended Super Frame -Suppression Type of zero code suppression 3–130 - AMI ZCS...
  • Page 49 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-29 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued Tie Lines * Direction Tie trunks direction 3–139 - Two Way - OutGoing - Incoming * Intype Signaling type: incoming tie trunk 3–142 - Wink...
  • Page 50 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-30 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued TT/LS Disc * OutMode Outmode Signaling for loop- or ground-start trunks 3–52 * LS Disconnect Disconnect signaling reliability 3–61 - Yes - No...

  • Page 51: Timers And Counters

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-31 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - 5ESS Local Local service - OUTWATS - 56/64 Digit - VirtPrivNet - INWATS - MCI Toll - Misc Miscellaneous network service - Other...
  • Page 52 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-32 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued *DialPlanRtg Dial Plan Routing 3–224 - Service Service - AT&T Toll AT&T toll service - Megacom 800 - ACCUNET SDS - SoftDefNetw - MULTI QUEST...
  • Page 53 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-33 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - CBC Service Call-by-Call service 3–249 - Patterns - Voice Data - Voice Only - Data Only - Voice/Data - NetworkServ Network service...
  • Page 54 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-34 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued - ARS Restrict Non-Tie trunk ARS Facility Restriction Level - Allow List Non-Tie trunk Allowed Lists assignment - DisallowLst Non-Tie trunk Disallowed Lists assignment * TIE Lines...
  • Page 55 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-35 Description Page LinesTrunks Continued Clock Sync Clock Synchronization (100D or 800 NI-BRI modules) 3–85 * Primary Primary Clock - Loop - Local * Secondary Secondary Clock...
  • Page 56 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-36 Description Page Extensions Continued Ext Status Extension status: hotel or Group Calling/CMS 3–466 Group Page Paging group members 3–400 Group Cover Coverage group members 3–403 Grp Calling...
  • Page 57 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-37 Description Page Continued Extensions DisplayPref Preference for incoming call display 3–356 * Calling Name * Calling Num * Both ServiceObs Service Observing 3–358 * Observer...
  • Page 58 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-38 Description Page Options Continued Inside Dial System dial tone 3–481 * Inside * Outside Reminder Srv Time of day reminder service calls are canceled 3–482 Unassigned Extension number to receive redirected calls made...
  • Page 59 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-39 Description Page Tables Allow List Establish Allowed Lists 3–492 Allow To Assign an Allowed List to a given extension 3–494 Disallow Establish a Disallowed List 3–497...
  • Page 60 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-40 Description Page Tables Continued UDP Routing Routing for non-local UDP calls 3–565 * Pool Assign pools to routes 3–566 * FRL Assign FRLs to routes 3–569 * Absorb...
  • Page 61 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-41 Description Page NightSrvce GroupAssign Night Service group assignment 3–582 * Extensions * Calling Grp OutRestrict Password for use with out of hours calls 3–586 Emergency Emergency numbers free from password requirement...
  • Page 62 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Programming Procedures Page 1-42 Description Page Print Print system reports 3–613 Print all reports SysSet-up System Information report Dial Plan Dial Plan report Labels Label Information report Trunk Info Trunk Information report...

  • Page 63: Programming Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-43 Description Page Cntr-Prg Centralized telephone programming Program Ext Extension programming 4–4 Copy Ext Copy extension programming 4–13 Language Language options...

  • Page 64: Access To System Programming From The Mlx-20L Console

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-44 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Display the Menu Mode (main menu) screen. Press Menu Select System Programming. Note: does not appear on this screen if the programming console is...

  • Page 65: System Programming Menu Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-45 System Programming Menu Figure 1–11 shows the two screens that make up the System Programming menu.

  • Page 66: Exiting System Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Access to System Programming from the MLX-20L Console Page 1-46 Figure 1–11. System Programming Menu Screens Exiting System Programming Use the information in Table 1–6 to return to the System Programming menu, the main menu (Menu Mode screen), or the Home screen from within a programming screen.

  • Page 67: Idle States

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-47 Idle States Some programming procedures can be started only when the entire system, or some part of it, such as a trunk or an extension, is idle (not in use). Some procedures require that a trunk or extension be idle only at the instant of programming.
  • Page 68 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-48 System Forced Idle When the entire system is forced idle, no calls can be made or received. The following procedures can be performed only when the entire system (every line and every extension) is idle: Select system mode Identify system operator positions...
  • Page 69 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Idle States Page 1-49 Extension Forced Idle When an extension is forced idle, no calls can be made or received on that telephone or data equipment. The following procedures can be performed only when the extension being programmed is idle: Assign calling restrictions Assign pool dial-out restrictions...
  • Page 70 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-50 Product Enhancements This section briefly describes these enhancements and new features for each release of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. The procedures that cover these enhancements are included in this book.
  • Page 71 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-51 Users that travel between sites can dial the same digits anywhere in the private network to access the voice messaging system. For example, a salesperson headquartered in Cincinnati can dial the same four digits at the company’s Los Angeles office to retrieve voice messages.
  • Page 72 PRI Switch Type Test A new maintenance test, the PRI Switch Type Test, has been created to allow Lucent Technologies technicians or authorized dealers to automatically determine if each end of the PRI tandem trunks has been programmed correctly. Service Observing Service Observing allows one extension to listen in on (observe) a call at another extension.
  • Page 73 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-53 Win SPM The System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software is now available in a Windows format called Win SPM . For Release 6.1 and later systems, Win SPM provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for those tasks must commonly performed by the system manager.
  • Page 74 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-54 associates with routes, Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs), digit absorption, and digit prepending. This allows ARS-like routing of non-local dial plan calls.
  • Page 75 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-55 Voice Mail and Auto Attendant. Private network systems should have their own local voice mail and/or auto attendant applications as well as their own external alerts and Music On Hold sources.
  • Page 76 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-56 All three overflow distribution options—based on the number of calls, the time a caller has waited, and according to the caller’s prompt—may be used at one time. In this case, time-based and number-of-calls based options take precedence over overflow distribution based on the caller’s prompt.

  • Page 77: (Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    A PassageWay Telephony Services CTI link from the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell® NetWare® software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations. The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and ISDN link interface card plugged into the customer’s server.
  • Page 78 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-58 NOTE: Transfer and 3-way conference, when handled through a CTI link application, provide the original caller’s calling number information or other information to the transfer receiver or new conference participant, if the user has screen-pop capability.
  • Page 79 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-59 HotLine Feature The Release 5.0 HotLine feature is designed for retail sales, catalogue sales, and other types of businesses and organizations and is available in all three modes of system operation.
  • Page 80 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-60 Delay Announcement Devices The system manager can designate as many as ten primary delay announcement devices per group rather than the single device for each group that is available in Release 4.2 and earlier systems.
  • Page 81 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-61 NOTE: A DSS (Direct Station Selector) button that is used as a Calls-in-Queue Alarm button can only indicate two threshold levels, either by flashing or by lighting steadily.
  • Page 82 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-62 The following MCI PRI and PRI local exchange carrier (LEC) services (along with AT&T Switched Network Services) can be provided to users of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System: MCI Toll Services for DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type: —...
  • Page 83 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-63 Coding of Calls on Reports. An asterisk (*) appears in the call record when: A call is not answered by an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group agent and is abandoned while waiting for an agent.
  • Page 84 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-64 Release 4.1 Enhancements (June, 1997) Release 4.1 includes all Release 4.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below. There are no hardware changes in Release 4.1. Coverage Timers Programmed for Individual Extensions Beginning with Release 4.1, coverage timers, which control the duration of the...
  • Page 85 Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs). The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include a 800 NI-BRI module.
  • Page 86 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-66 Support for National ISDN BRI Service This service provides a low-cost alternative to loop-start and ground-start trunks for voice and digital data connectivity to the Central Office. Each of the two B (bearer)-channels on a BRI line can carry one voice or one data call at any given time.
  • Page 87 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-67 Voice Announce on the QCC The QCC operator can enable the fifth Call Button to announce a call on another user’s speakerphone if the destination telephone has a Voice Announce capable SA button available.
  • Page 88 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-68 Release 3.1 Enhancements (March, 1996) Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality plus the enhancements listed below. Security Features New security features include a variety of components. Additional details are included elsewhere in this book.
  • Page 89 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-69 Pool Dial-Out Code Restriction by Default The factory setting for the Pool Dial-Out Code restriction has changed to restricted. No extension or remote access user with a barrier code has access to pools until the restriction is removed by the system manager.
  • Page 90 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-70 Release 3.0 Enhancements (August, 1994) Release 3.0 includes all Release 2.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below. Equipment New hardware includes a variety of components. Additional details are included elsewhere in this book.
  • Page 91 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-71 Advice and feedback administration screens for new Release 3.0 functionality PCMCIA Memory Card Interface (a Release 3.0 processor board required) allowing: —...
  • Page 92 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-72 Authorization Codes The Authorization Code feature allows you to make calls using your calling privileges when you are dialing from an extension other than your own. When you enter your authorization code (ranging from 2 to 11 characters and unique across the system), the privileges and restrictions assigned to your home extension override the current restrictions at the host extension.
  • Page 93 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-73 Fax Attendant 2.1.1 Fax Attendant Release 2.1.1., which co-resides with AUDIX Voice Power on the IS III Release 1.2 platform, provides the same functionality as earlier versions, plus the following enhancements: Personal Fax Messaging.

  • Page 94: Product Enhancements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-74 Calls that have been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be picked up by a person who has a personal line button for the call.
  • Page 95 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-75 Installation and Hardware Installation and hardware enhancements include the following: The control unit covers for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System are the same easy-to-use covers as those for the MERLIN II Communications System.
  • Page 96 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-76 Additional Application Packages, Telephones, Adjuncts, and Adapter Additional application packages, adjuncts, and adapter enhancements include the following: A Digital Announcer Unit, compatible with all call management systems and tip/ring applications currently available for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
  • Page 97 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-77 Release 2.0 Enhancements (October, 1992) Refer to Release 2.0 Notes for detailed descriptions of Release 2.0 enhancements. Release 2.0 includes all Release 1.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 98 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-78 Coverage receivers can call coverage senders and have the call receive coverage treatment. If a receiver calls a sender for whom he or she is covering, and the sender is busy or unavailable, the call proceeds to other points of coverage.
  • Page 99 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-79 Maintenance Maintenance enhancements include the following: Clear descriptions of module test failures Optional printing of hard copy of error logs Display that correlates extension numbers with slot/port and logical ID Display showing which slots, trunks, and extensions are maintenance busy Internal digital switching element (DSE) loopback test for all modules...

  • Page 100: (Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Basics Product Enhancements Page 1-80 Operational System operational enhancements include the following: Automatic selection of an SA button when Conference is invoked (Hybrid/PBX mode) Prompting through Conference feature on MLX display telephones Relocation of the More prompt on the MLX-20L display Display of the number saved on a programmed Last Number Dial or Saved Number Dial button when the button is inspected...

  • Page 101: Programming With Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Page 2-1 Programming with SPM The System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software package offers an alternate method of programming the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System using a PC.

  • Page 102: System Requirements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM System Requirements Page 2-2 This book describes the use of SPM on a PC with a DOS operating system only. If you are using Win SPM, refer to the documentation that was provided with the Win SPM application for information.
  • Page 103 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-3 Direct local connection, if the PC is more than 50 ft. from the control unit: — 355AF adapter —...
  • Page 104 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-4 DOS Installation Use the following procedure to install SPM on the hard drive of a DOS PC. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 105 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-5 Creates the following directories if they do not already exist: — c:\spm\backup — c:\spm\reports — c:\spm\tmp Does one of the following: —...
  • Page 106 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-6 DOS Installation with Windows 95 Using DOS SPM with Windows 95 improves the interaction of SPM with the operating system compared to a Windows 3.x installation.

  • Page 107: Installing The Spm Software

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-7 Installation With Windows 95 running on your PC, follow these steps to install SPM on the PC’s hard disk: Insert the SPM installation disk in any floppy disk drive (usually the A drive).
  • Page 108 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-8 If your PC does not have a copy of print.exe in any directory listed in your system’s PATH environment, the following message appears: Press any key to continue installation.
  • Page 109 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-9 Configuring a PIF file for DOS SPM Refer to the Windows 95 Help topic, “PIF editor,” for details about using the PIF editor to implement an SPM PIF file to work with the spm.exe file.

  • Page 110: Spm Configuration File (Ams.cfg) Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-10 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: The DEBUG attribute is also specified in ams.cfg as (off), the factory setting, or (on).
  • Page 111 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-11 The screens shown in Steps 3 through 7 appear only if the system has not been initialized. Otherwise, the screen shown in Step 8 appears. Select the serial communications port used for SPM and press Type for serial port 1 (COM1).
  • Page 112 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Installing the SPM Software Page 2-12 Review your selections. x = the values entered for each entry in Steps 3 through 5 To change any of the information shown, type and press .

  • Page 113: Connecting The Pc

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-13 Connecting the PC There are three ways to connect the PC to the control unit. Choose the method below that is most useful for your installation.

  • Page 114: Direct Local Connection, Pc More Than 50 Ft. Away

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-14 Processor Module SMDR Jack ADMIN Jack 355AF Adapter Crossover Cable EIA-232-D Tu rn po we r be ins ert for e ing or ov ing...

  • Page 115: Local Modem Connection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-15 Local Modem Connection For a local modem connection, you must use a modem (either connected to, or built into, the PC) to access the internal modem in the control unit. Connect the modem to an 012 T/R or 016 T/R module in the control unit, as shown in Figure 2–3.

  • Page 116: Remote Modem Connection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Connecting the PC Page 2-16 Remote Modem Connection For a remote modem connection, you must use a modem (either connected to, or built into, the PC) to access the internal modem in the control unit. You must also use a dial-up connection, as shown in Figure 2–4.

  • Page 117: Accessing Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-17 Accessing SPM The procedure for accessing SPM depends on whether your PC is connected to the control unit with a modem (either local or remote) or without a modem (direct). This section covers both of these access procedures.
  • Page 118 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-18 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: The function keys shown on either side of the display are included here for quick reference. See “SPM Screens”...
  • Page 119 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-19 If the PC is in the same location as the control unit, type If the PC is in a remote location and your system has the Remote Access feature activated, type the following and press —...

  • Page 120: System Programming Guide 555

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Accessing SPM Page 2-20 Press any key to display a blank screen on which you can enter modem commands. (You may have to press the key several times.) Make a data connection to the modem of the control unit.

  • Page 121: Using Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-21 Using SPM This section describes how to use the SPM screens, SPM Help, and the SPM options listed below. Backup Boards Browse...

  • Page 122: Spm Display

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-22 Figure 2–5. SPM Display through , and through display on either side of the console simulation window. They represent the function keys to use when you select screen options.

  • Page 123: Function Of Pc Keys In Spm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-23 Table 2–2. Function of PC Keys in SPM PC Key Console SPM Function Quit. Exit from SPM and return to the DOS Home prompt when you finish with system programming.
  • Page 124 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-24 Table 2–2. Function of PC Keys in SPM (Continued) PC Key Console SPM Function Escape to shell. To use this key sequence, you must set DEBUG=1 in the configuration file ams.cfg.

  • Page 125: Spm Main Menu Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-25 SPM Main Menu Options The SPM Main Menu provides access to system programming and to the SPM functions listed in Table 2–3.

  • Page 126: Spm Help

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-26 SPM Help To access the SPM help screens, press To review the help screens press, To return to the first help screen, press To exit from SPM help, press A typical help screen is shown in Figure...

  • Page 127: Backup Header: Release Number

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-27 Backup The Backup procedure is used by qualified service personnel to create a file of system programming information either in the \spm\backup directory (on the hard drive of the PC) or in the root directory of a floppy disk.
  • Page 128 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-28 Considerations Review the following items before you begin the backup procedure: The communications system does not have to be idle during backup; however, extension programming is blocked.
  • Page 129 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-29 Remove the SPM disk from the floppy drive and insert a formatted disk. Use the arrow keys to highlight and press After you press , the...
  • Page 130 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-30 Verify that the filename chosen does not already exist. The following screen appears only if the filename chosen already exists. Continue with Step 7 if this screen does not appear.
  • Page 131 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-31 To abort the backup, press to return to the SPM Main Menu. When the backup is complete, press to return to the SPM Main Menu. xxx = total number of blocks received Boards The Boards option allows qualified service personnel to add a board to the next...

  • Page 132: Board Types

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-32 The Inspect function ( ) lets you see which modules have been assigned to slots on the control unit. Note that both phantom boards and real boards display if you use the Inspect function.
  • Page 133 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-33 Follow the steps below to assign modules. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Press the function key that corresponds to the module you want to select. If the module you want to assign is not shown on the first screen of the Boards menu, press to display the next menu screen.
  • Page 134 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-34 Assign or remove the module from the slot entered in Step 3. module name = option selected in Step 2 nn = slot entered in Step 3 To remove the module type from the specified slot number, press ).
  • Page 135 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-35 Browse The Browse option allows you to browse through reports saved in the Reports directory (\spm\reports) on the hard disk of the PC or on a floppy. At the SPM Main Menu, press to activate the Browse option.
  • Page 136 “Upgrading the System” on page 2–56. This procedure should be done only by Lucent Technologies personnel or your authorized dealer. To convert system programming to Release 6.1 format, Version 6.25 (or later) of SPM is required. This version can be easily identified by the version number that appears on the last line of the console simulation window.
  • Page 137 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-37 Follow the instructions for a floppy or hard disk. A second window appears which displays the option and a directory listing for the C:\spm\backup directory.
  • Page 138 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-38 Observe the updated file selection screen and press FILENAME.XXX =the backup filename selected in Step 4 N = drive Observe the CONVERT TO screen.
  • Page 139 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-39 Use the arrow keys to highlight and press After you press , the statement shown above changes to and the directory listing from the root directory of the disk in Drive A appears.
  • Page 140 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-40 The converted file cannot have the same name as the file from which you converted. If you specify the same filename, the following screen appears: Press and repeat this step.
  • Page 141 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-41 Language A language attribute in the SPM configuration file \spm\ams.cfg (DOS version) or /usr/ams/ams.cfg (UNIX System version) specifies whether SPM menus, pop-up windows, and other messages are presented in English, French, or Spanish.
  • Page 142 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-42 Press the function key that corresponds to your language selection. The Display Language screen reappears, with the language you selected. Press to return to the SPM Main Menu or select another language.

  • Page 143: Pass-Thru

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-43 Remote Direct Connection Connection Turn power inserti before remov ng or modu AG INPUT AG INPUT SPM PC Control Unit IS II/III PC Figure 2–7.
  • Page 144 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-44 To initiate Pass-Thru, establish a modem connection between the SPM PC and the control unit. If the IS II/III PC does not respond to the Pass-Thru request from the control unit (for example, because the PC is turned off), you see the following message: If the connection between the control unit and the IS II/III PC fails, the connection between the control unit and the SPM PC is dropped.
  • Page 145 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-45 Type for the terminal emulation type, and press If you are working with IS II, the IS II main menu appears. If you are working with IS III, the system prompts you for your login registration.
  • Page 146 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-46 Type the old (current) password. Do not press If you type the old password incorrectly, the bottom of the screen displays the message .
  • Page 147 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-47 Print Options The Print Opts option allows qualified service personnel to direct the output of system programming reports either to the PC (where you can save them, browse through them, or print them with the system programming Print option) or to the SMDR printer.
  • Page 148 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-48 Restore The Restore option allows qualified service personnel to load system programming from either a disk or from the hard disk into the processor module memory.
  • Page 149 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-49 Follow the steps below to perform a restore. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk. A second window appears which displays the option and a directory listing for C:\spm\backup.
  • Page 150 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Using SPM Page 2-50 Specify the filename from which to restore. To select the default backup filename, use the arrow keys to highlight and press If you used a different backup filename, use the arrow keys to select one of the other filenames and press...

  • Page 151: System Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-51 System Programming A primary function of SPM is to provide a method for programming the communications system. The Sys Program option gives you access to all of the system programming features available from the system programming console.
  • Page 152 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-52 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If a procedure requires an idle condition, perform the programming outside of normal business hours. If a procedure requires that the system be in an idle state and the system is busy when you begin, you see the screen shown below.
  • Page 153 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-53 Line or Trunk Idle Since these procedures require the line or trunk to be idle only at the instant of programming, the line or trunk is not forced idle.
  • Page 154 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-54 Accessing System Programming Follow the steps below to access system programming. At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Press the function key next to the option you want.
  • Page 155 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM System Programming Page 2-55 Press the function key that corresponds to the report to be printed. Use one of the methods shown after this procedure to print the report(s). Observe the print status screen.
  • Page 156 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-56 Print to Floppy Disk Use the arrow keys to highlight : and press . Use one of the methods shown below.
  • Page 157 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-57 Before You Begin Before you begin the upgrade to Release 6.1, you will need the items listed below. Any version of SPM to backup system programming information.

  • Page 158: Programming Compatibility

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-58 Table 2–6. Programming Compatibility Restore on Program Version Backup from 2.0/2.1 4.1/4.2 1.13 1.16 2.09 2.16 yes* 3.18 yes* yes* yes* no...

  • Page 159: Upgrading The System

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-59 Table 2–6. Programming Compatibility (Continued) Restore on Program Version Backup from 2.0/2.1 4.1/4.2 3.18 4.15 yes* no 4.25 yes* yes* 5.15 yes* yes*...
  • Page 160 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-60 Upgrade Procedure NOTE: The system upgrade procedure must follow the order of the steps shown below. Back up your system programming. This step creates a file containing system programming information.
  • Page 161 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-61 If a new processor module was installed in Step 5, proceed to Step 7. Otherwise, insert the R6.1 forced installation memory card into the PCMCIA memory card slot on the processor module.
  • Page 162 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-62 Table 2–10. Lists the features added with Release 3.1 of the communications system. — When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 3.1, you must program these features as the last step of the upgrade procedure.
  • Page 163 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-63 — When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 4.1, you must program the features listed in Table 2–9, then the features listed in...
  • Page 164 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-64 Table 2–14. Lists the features added with Release 5.0 of the communications system. — When you upgrade from Release 4.2 to Release 5.0, you must program the features listed in Table 2–14.
  • Page 165 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-65 — When you upgrade from Release 4.0 to Release 6.0, you must program the features listed in Table 2–12, then the features listed in Table 2–13, then the features listed in...

  • Page 166: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 1.1

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-66 — When you upgrade from Release 4.0 to Release 6.1, you must program the features listed in Table 2–12, then the features listed in Table 2–13, then the features listed in...

  • Page 167: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release 2.0

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-67 Table 2–8. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 2.0 Feature Sequence Primary Rate Interface (PRI) DID Emulation on T1 More Night Service Calling Group...

  • Page 168: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-68 Table 2–9. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 3.0 Feature Sequence Automatic Backup Incoming Call Line More Drop Identification Delay Dial trunk no.
  • Page 169 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-69 Table 2–11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.0 Feature Sequence Delayed Call More Dial ext. no. Forwarding Dial no.

  • Page 170: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-70 Table 2–12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 Feature Sequence Group Coverage Ring More More Delay sender’s extension number of rings Primary Cover Ring More...

  • Page 171: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-71 Table 2–12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 (Continued) Feature Sequence Switched 56 Data To select T1 All Tie: Switched 56 Data: Dial slot no.

  • Page 172: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-72 Table 2–13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 Feature Sequence SMDR Talk Time PRI Switch Types To select the Nortel DMS-250 for MCI services: Dial slot no.

  • Page 173: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-73 Table 2–13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 (Continued) Feature Sequence PRI Call-by-Call To select MCI Toll Call-by-Call Services for a Services Table DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type: List no.
  • Page 174 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-74 Table 2–14. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 5.0 (Continued) Feature Sequence Calling Group Alarm More Thresholds Dial calling group ext. no. Drop Dial no.

  • Page 175: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-75 Table 2–15. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 6.0 Feature Sequence UDP Routing Patterns Enter Pattern Number (1-20) Enter Route Number (1-4) Enter pool dial-out code Enter Pattern...

  • Page 176: Programming Needed After Upgrade To Release

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Upgrading the System Page 2-76 Table 2–16. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 6.1 Feature Sequence Service To assign a Service Observer to a Service Observing group: Observing More More...

  • Page 177: Surrogate Mode Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming Page 2-77 Surrogate Mode Programming Surrogate mode allows qualified service personnel to perform system programming at an offsite service location. The actual communications system hardware does not have to be installed —...
  • Page 178 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming with SPM Surrogate Mode Programming Page 2-78...

  • Page 179: Programming Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Page 3-1 Programming Procedures This chapter contains all of the procedures required for programming each of the features and options that are available for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.

  • Page 180: Basic System Operating Conditions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-2 Basic System Operating Conditions The procedures in this section are all related to the system, rather than to the operation of telephones, operator positions, lines, or trunks.

  • Page 181: Basic System Operating Conditions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-3 Summary: System Restart Programmable by Qualified support personnel Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Not applicable Factory Setting None Valid Entries None...
  • Page 182 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-4 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Respond to the query. To restart the system, select . The System Restart screen appears. To terminate the restart and return to the System menu, select , then select...
  • Page 183 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-5 Summary: System Programming Position Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode. Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting First extension jack on the first MLX module (also set as an operator position)
  • Page 184 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-6 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current extension ( xxxx ). Press Drop. Enter the new extension. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
  • Page 185 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-7 Summary: System Language Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting English Valid Entries...
  • Page 186 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-8 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select System Language. Respond to the prompt. To set the system language, select To terminate the procedure and return to the previous screen, select , then select...
  • Page 187 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-9 Board Renumbering CAUTION: CAUTION: This procedure is to be performed by qualified support personnel only. Use this procedure to renumber boards that have already been installed. This procedure restarts the system (system programming is not lost).
  • Page 188 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-10 Procedure: Board Renumbering Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. Select Board Renumbering. Respond to the prompt. To continue the Board Renumbering procedure, select .
  • Page 189 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-11 Mode of Operation The system mode Key, Behind Switch, or Hybrid/PBX determines how the system operates and directly affects the following operations: How lines and/or trunks are provided to users Types of operator consoles allowed Features available...
  • Page 190 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-12 Procedure: Mode of Operation Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. Select Mode. Select the mode. Select Save your entry.

  • Page 191: Automatic Maintenance Busy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-13 Automatic Maintenance Busy Automatic Maintenance Busy allows the system to take a malfunctioning trunk out of service for outgoing calls (incoming calls are never blocked). This prevents faulty outside facilities from causing disruptions in outgoing calling patterns.
  • Page 192 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-14 Procedure: Automatic Maintenance Busy Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System menu. Select Automatic Maintenance Busy. Enable or disable Automatic Maintenance Busy. leaves malfunctioning trunks available for outgoing calls.
  • Page 193 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-15 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the malfunctioning tie trunk service. If you selected and your system has tie trunks, specify whether to take malfunctioning tie trunks out of service automatically or leave malfunctioning tie trunks available for outgoing calls.
  • Page 194 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-16 Summary: Set System Date Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting 01-01-00 Valid Entries...
  • Page 195 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-17 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current system date ( xxxxxx ) . Press Drop. Enter six digits for the current date. Dial or type [ mmddyy ].
  • Page 196 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-18 Summary: Set System Time Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not Required Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting 0000 Valid Entries...
  • Page 197 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Basic System Operating Conditions Page 3-19 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current system time ( xxxx ) . Press Drop. Enter four digits for the current time. Dial or type [ hhmm ].

  • Page 198: System Renumbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-20 System Renumbering The procedures in this section are used to assign the 2-digit, 3-digit, and Set Up Space numbering plans for the local MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...

  • Page 199: 2-Digit Numbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-21 When trunk or extension modules are removed from the control unit, the remaining modules must be rearranged so that no empty slots remain. The system does not acknowledge any modules installed after an empty slot;...

  • Page 200: 3-Digit Numbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-22 Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 100 199 Extensions 200 299 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 300–399 MFMs/Terminal Adapters 400 499 500 599 600 699 Main Pool Calling Groups...
  • Page 201 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-23 Select System Numbering Plan WARNING: To avoid possible loss of system programming information, renumber the system before you program the rest of the options described in this chapter. The three available local system numbering plans listed below appear on System Planning Form 2a.
  • Page 202 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-24 Summary: Select System Numbering Plan Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition System idle Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Two-digit Valid Entries...
  • Page 203 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-25 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the appropriate system numbering plan. Select and go to Step 5. Select and go to Step 5. Select and continue with Step 4.
  • Page 204 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-26 Single Renumbering Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone, accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed Directory Number.
  • Page 205 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-27 Procedure: Single Renumbering Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System Renumbering menu. Select Single renumbering. If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition, or exit system programming and try again later.
  • Page 206 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-28 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the old extension for the item selected (****) in Step 4. If you get the Station Busy message, wait for an idle connection, or exit system programming and try again later.

  • Page 207: Block Renumbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-29 Block Renumbering Use this procedure to assign extension numbers to a group of extensions, accessories, or lines. Both the original numbers and the numbers they are being changed to must be sequentially numbered.
  • Page 208 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-30 Procedure: Block Renumbering Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System Renumber menu. Select Block renumbering. If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition, or exit system programming and try again later.
  • Page 209 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-31 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the currently assigned number for the last member of the group. Ã nnnn = number entered in Step 4 = option name selected in Step 3 SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 210 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-32 Non-Local Dial Plan Extension Ranges In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the system manager can enter ranges of extensions for non-local systems networked to the local MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.
  • Page 211 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-33 WARNING: Use extreme caution when employing the option of System Renumbering. Any numbering you have entered is erased and the system numbering is set to factory settings.
  • Page 212 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-34 Renumbering of non-local extensions does not require putting those extensions in the forced-idle condition on the remote system. The pattern number specified in this procedure creates an index into a group of routes that are used to connect to the non-local dial plan extensions.
  • Page 213 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-35 Procedure: Specifying New Extension Ranges Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System Renumber menu. Select Non-Local UDP renumbering. Dial or type the first number in the range. If the number conflicts with an existing number on the local system, or it is not the beginning number of an existing range and...
  • Page 214 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-36 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number for the last extension in the range. It must be equal to or higher than the starting number.
  • Page 215 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-37 Deleting Extension Ranges This procedure deletes the numbering for specified extension ranges of a non- local system and can be used, for example, to prepare for renumbering local or remote system extensions.
  • Page 216 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-38 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Non-local renumbering. Dial or type the first number in the range of extensions to delete. If the number conflicts with an existing number on the local system or is not the beginning number of an existing range and...
  • Page 217 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-39 Direct Station Selector (DSS) Page Buttons Use this procedure to set the three Page buttons on the DSS to correspond to the system numbering plan.
  • Page 218 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-40 Procedure: Assign Direct Station Selector Page Buttons Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the System Renumber menu. Select Single renumbering. Go to the second screen of the System Renumber menu. Press More.
  • Page 219 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Renumbering Page 3-41 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of the Page button you want to program ( n =1 to 3). Dial or type [ n ].

  • Page 220: System Operator Positions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-42 System Operator Positions A system operator position, for a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator or a Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator, should be programmed before you program lines or trunks.
  • Page 221 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-43 Primary Operator Positions The primary operator position is the extension to which your call is directed when 0 is dialed on a System Access button. The first extension jack on the first MLX module in your system is assigned as the primary operator position.
  • Page 222 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-44 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial ext. no. PC Procedure Type ext. no. Procedure: QCC Operator Positions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu.
  • Page 223 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-45 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the QCC extension as a QCC position. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 224 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-46 Summary: Identify or Remove DLC Operator Positions Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition System idle Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Type: DLC Valid Entries...
  • Page 225 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Operator Positions Page 3-47 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Direct-Line Console (DLC). If you get the System Busy message, wait for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.

  • Page 226: Lines And Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-48 Lines and Trunks The procedures in this section are used to assign optional features to individual lines and trunks. The following optional features can be assigned: Type of Trunk Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer...

  • Page 227: Lines And Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-49 Type of Trunk Use this procedure to specify the type of trunk, loop-start (LS) or ground-start (GS), for each outside trunk connected to one of the following modules: 400 GS/LS 408 GS/LS 800 GS/LS...
  • Page 228 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-50 Procedure: Type of Trunk Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the module ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 229 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-51 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the type of trunks connected to the module. = 400 GS/LS, 408 GS/LS, 408 GS/LS-MLX,800 GS/LS, or 800 GS/LS-ID.
  • Page 230 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-52 Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Use this procedure to identify either touch-tone signaling or rotary-dial signaling for outgoing calls placed by using the specified loop- or ground-start trunk. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 231 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-53 Procedure: Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Touch-Tone/Loop-Start Disconnect. Select Outward Dialing Mode.
  • Page 232 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-54 Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter the number of the line/trunk with touch-tone dialing. Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 233 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-55 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console.
  • Page 234 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-56 Procedure: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More.
  • Page 235 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-57 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select Ringing Frequency Use this procedure to program the ringing frequency on an 016 T/R module. Contact your service provider for more information about the appropriate setting.
  • Page 236 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-58 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More. Select Ringing Frequency. Enter the slot number of the 016 T/R module ( xx = 1 to 17). Dial or type [ xx ].
  • Page 237 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-59 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select Second Dial Tone Timer Use this procedure to program the second dial tone timer.
  • Page 238 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-60 Procedure: Second Dial Tone Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More.
  • Page 239 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-61 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the second dial tone timer ( nnnn = 0 to 5,000 ms, in increments of 200 ms). Dial or type [ nnnn ].
  • Page 240 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-62 Summary: Disconnect Signaling Reliability Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting Unreliable Valid Entries...
  • Page 241 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-63 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start Disconnect. Specify the disconnect signal as reliable or unreliable. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 242 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-64 Summary: Toll Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting Toll prefix required Valid Entries...
  • Page 243 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-65 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Toll Type. Specify the toll type line(s). For a single line, go to Single Line Procedure. For a block of lines, go to Block Procedure.
  • Page 244 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-66 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from the line/trunk. Select You may continue to assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 245 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-67 Hold Disconnect Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of milliseconds before a loop-start line/trunk is released when a caller on hold hangs up and abandons the call. This can be specified as either a long interval (450 ms) or a short interval (50 ms).
  • Page 246 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-68 Procedure: Hold Disconnect Interval Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More.
  • Page 247 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-69 Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter the number of the line or trunk with a long disconnect interval. Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 248 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-70 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console.
  • Page 249 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-71 Summary: Principal User for Personal Line Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 250 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-72 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Principal User. Enter the line or trunk number to which you are assigning a principal user. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...
  • Page 251 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-73 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign a principal user to another line or trunk, or go to Step 9. Select Return to Step 6.
  • Page 252 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-74 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: More Dial priority level Select entry mode Dial trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: More Dial priority level Select block of lines...
  • Page 253 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-75 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select QCC Queue Priority. Enter the QCC priority level ( n = 1 to 7). Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 254 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-76 Single Line Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter the line or trunk with the specified queue priority. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...
  • Page 255 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-77 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console.
  • Page 256 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-78 Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Calls Programmable by. System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting No QCC operator is assigned to receive calls.
  • Page 257 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-79 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More. Select QCC Operator. Specify the QCC operator extension.
  • Page 258 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-80 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the line(s) associated with the QCC operator. xxxx = extension number entered in Step 4 For a single line/trunk, go to Single Line Procedure.
  • Page 259 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-81 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console. Select Assign or remove the lines for the specified QCC operator.
  • Page 260 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-82 Summary: Loop-Start Identification Delay Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Factory Setting No delay Valid Entries...
  • Page 261 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-83 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More. Select Loop-Start Identification Delay. Specify the line(s) for LS-ID Delay.
  • Page 262 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-84 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the LS-ID Delay. Select You may continue to assign or remove the LS-ID delay from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 263 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-85 Clock Synchronization NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: The following information is for planning clock synchronization in systems that are not part of a private network. For planning clock synchronization in a private network configuration, see the Network Reference .
  • Page 264 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-86 Procedure: Clock Synchronization Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More.
  • Page 265 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-87 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the slot number of the module to contain the primary system clock. Dial or type [ xx ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 266 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-88 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Secondary. Enter the slot number of the module to contain the secondary system clock. Dial or type [ xx ].
  • Page 267 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-89 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the 800 NI-BRI module port to be the secondary clock source. Dial or type [ x ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 268 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-90 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify whether the clock is to be synchronized to an outside endpoint (loop) or is to be free running (local), then go to Step 21. xx = slot number entered in Step 17 Select Select the port on the 800 NI-BRI module to be the tertiary clock source.
  • Page 269 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-91 Trunks to Pools Assignment Use this procedure to create trunk pools (groups of outside lines/trunks connected to the system). Trunk pools are used to specify preferred routes for Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
  • Page 270 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-92 The system provides an error tone when a line/trunk is in use, or if a loudspeaker paging system, Music on Hold, or maintenance alarm is already assigned; however, the system does not indicate the reason for the error tone.
  • Page 271 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-93 Procedure: Trunks to Pools Assignment Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Pools. Enter the pool number. Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 272 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-94 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter the line/trunk number for the pool. xxx = pool dial-out code entered in Step 3 Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...
  • Page 273 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-95 Copy Options for Lines/Trunks Use this procedure to copy options assigned to loop-start or ground-start trunks, tie trunks, or DID trunks. Note that many of these options apply to Hybrid/PBX systems only.
  • Page 274 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-96 Summary: Copy Options for Lines/Trunks Programmable by System Manager Mode All (but note differences) Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: TIE Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID...
  • Page 275 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-97 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Copy. Specify trunk(s). To copy a single trunk, select and go to Single Trunk Procedure. To copy a block of trunks, select and go to...
  • Page 276 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-98 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the trunk number to copy to. xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1 Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...
  • Page 277 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Lines and Trunks Page 3-99 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the first trunk number to copy to. xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1 Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...

  • Page 278: Uniform Dial Plan Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 3-100 Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, provide support for Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) facilities, private network tandem lines/trunks originating at one or more other MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or DEFINITY Communications Systems.
  • Page 279 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 3-101 Wherever possible, the same switch identifiers should be used for the same switch across a private network. For example, LEGEND A is identified by switch identifier 22 in LEGEND B and LEGEND C systems in a private network.
  • Page 280 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 3-102 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More.
  • Page 281 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 3-103 Single Trunk Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify a single trunk identifier. Select Enter the number of the line/trunk. Dial or type [ nnnn ].
  • Page 282 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Facilities Page 3-104 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify identifiers for a block of trunks. Select Enter the starting trunk number in the range. Dial or type [ nnnn ].
  • Page 283 In Release 6.0 and later systems, you may order a point-to-point T1 circuit in order to provide amplification but not switching for a PRI tandem trunk that carries calls over long distances. PRI tandem trunks are preferable to T1 tandem trunks. Consult your Lucent Technologies representative for advice.
  • Page 284 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-106 If the type is T1 and the type of channel emulation is tie trunk, you must specify whether the lines/trunks are TIE-PBX, Toll, or Switched 56 Data service. The valid settings are as follows: TIE-PBX.

  • Page 285: Ds1 Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-107 If you select T1, channels can emulate ground- or loop-start trunks, tie trunks, or DID trunks in any combination. Note that unused channels must be specified as unequipped.
  • Page 286 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-108 To select T1- All Tie: Dial slot no. , or Dial channel no. To select T1- Tie: Dial slot , or Dial channel no.

  • Page 287: Switched 56 Data Signaling Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-109 To select T1- Tie: Type slot no. Select , or Type channel no. To select T1: ALL Switched 56 Data: Type slot no.
  • Page 288 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-110 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 289 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-111 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select a facility type. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select Save your entry. Select If you selected , you have finished this...
  • Page 290 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-112 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select If you selected , or , you have finished this procedure. If you selected trunks, continue with Step 10.
  • Page 291 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-113 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 13. Select Return to Step 10. The next slot is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 292 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-114 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the channel. Select You may continue to assign or remove additional channels by repeating Steps 3 and 4. Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 6.
  • Page 293 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-115 S56 Data Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the channel number ( nn = 1 to 24). xx = slot number entered in Step 3. Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 294 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-116 Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Direction. xx = channel selected in Step 1. Select , or Continue to assign direction to the next channel or go to Step 3. Select Return to Step 1.
  • Page 295 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-117 Trunk Seizure Type Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Trunk Seizure Type. xx = channel selected in Step x. = In or Out Select , or was selected in Step 3 of the main...
  • Page 296 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-118 Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current answer supervision time ( nnnn ) . xx = number entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 297 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-119 Disconnect Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current disconnect time ( nnnn ). xx = number entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 298 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-120 Dial Mode Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Choose an option. xx = channel selected in Step x = In or Out Select Continue to assign Dial Mode type to the next channel or go to Step 3.
  • Page 299 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-121 Direction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Direction. Select , or Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select four times.
  • Page 300 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-122 Answer Supervision Timing Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current answer supervision time ( nnnn ). Press Drop. Enter the new answer supervision time ( nnnn = 20 to 4,800 ms, in increments of 20 ms).
  • Page 301 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-123 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select four times. Dial Mode Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Choose an option.
  • Page 302 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-124 Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls received on a Switched 56 Network line.
  • Page 303 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-125 Switched 56 Data Dial Plan Routing Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More.
  • Page 304 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-126 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select an option. If you select , go to Expected Digits Procedure. If you select , go to Add Digits procedure.
  • Page 305 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-127 Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current digits added to a call ( nnnn = 0 to 9999). Press Drop.
  • Page 306 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-128 Frame Format Use this procedure to specify the framing format for the 100D module as D4-compatible or Extended Superframe. Your selection must match the framing mode at the far end of the DS1 facility.
  • Page 307 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-129 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 308 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-130 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. If you are using PRI Facilities, go to “Zero Code Suppression.”...
  • Page 309 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-131 Procedure: Zero Code Suppression Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 310 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-132 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Suppression. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select AMI zero code suppression or bipolar 8 zero substitution. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select Save your entry.
  • Page 311 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-133 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure Dial slot no. Select type of signaling PC Procedure Type slot no. Select type of signaling Procedure: Signaling Mode Console Display/Instructions...
  • Page 312 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-134 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Select Signaling. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 Select the type of signaling. xx = slot number entered in Step 3 is used for tandem PRI trunks.
  • Page 313 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-135 Summary: Line Compensation Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition 100D module idle Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting 1 (0.6 dB loss) Valid Entries...
  • Page 314 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-136 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 315 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-137 Channel Service Unit Use this procedure to specify the type of equipment provided by the local telephone company as foreign exchange or special access. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 316 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DS1 Facilities Page 3-138 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17). Dial or type [ nn ].

  • Page 317: Tie Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-139 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. Tie Trunks This section covers programming procedures for the following tie trunk options: Direction Tie Trunk Seizure Type E&M Signal...
  • Page 318 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-140 Procedure: Direction Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select TIE Lines. Select Direction.
  • Page 319 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-141 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the tie trunk number. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ] Save your entry.
  • Page 320 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-142 Tie Trunk Seizure Type Use this procedure to specify whether the seizure type of incoming or outgoing tie trunk is wink, delay, immediate, or automatic. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 321 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-143 Procedure: Tie Trunk Seizure Type Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Tie Lines. Select Intype (incoming) or Outtype (outgoing). Select Enter the tie trunk number.
  • Page 322 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-144 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Specify the tie trunk seizure type. xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 = option name selected in Step 3 is used for private tie trunks in R6.0 or later systems.
  • Page 323 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-145 E&M Signal Use this procedure to specify the type of tie trunk signal, as follows: E&M Mode: — 1S, Type 1 Standard. Tie trunks that are connected through the local telephone company.
  • Page 324 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-146 Procedure: E&M Signal Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Tie Lines. Select E&M Signal. Enter a tie trunk number. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...
  • Page 325 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-147 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Specify the type of signaling for the trunk. xxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Select , or Continue to assign E&M signaling to another trunk, or go to Step 8.
  • Page 326 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-148 Summary: Dial Mode Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone...
  • Page 327 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-149 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Tie Lines. Select Inmode signaling or Outmode signaling. Select Specify the line(s). = option name selected in Step 3 For a single line, go to Single Line Procedure.
  • Page 328 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-150 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter the number of the line/trunk. = option name selected in Step 3 Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 329 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-151 Block Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console.
  • Page 330 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-152 PC Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Type trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Select block of lines Toggle letter On/Off Procedure: Tie Trunk Dial Tone...
  • Page 331 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-153 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Dial Tone. Specify the line(s). = option name selected in Step 3 For a single line, go to Single Line Procedure.
  • Page 332 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-154 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove remote dial tone. Select You may continue to assign or remove remote dial tone from additional lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
  • Page 333 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-155 Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk answer supervision time in milliseconds. This is the time limit for the called system to respond. Summary: Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 334 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-156 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Tie Lines. Select Answer Supervision. Enter a tie trunk number. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ]...
  • Page 335 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-157 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of milliseconds ( nnnn ). xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 336 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-158 Disconnect Time Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk disconnect time limit in milliseconds. Summary: Disconnect Time Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition...
  • Page 337 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-159 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Tie Lines. Select Disconnect. Enter the trunk number. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ]...
  • Page 338 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Tie Trunks Page 3-160 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current disconnect time ( nnnn ). xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4 Press Drop. Enter the disconnect time ( nnnn = 140 to 2,400 ms).

  • Page 339: Did Trunks

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-161 3 we DID Trunks This section covers programming DID trunks and includes procedures for the following: Block Assignment DID Trunk Type Disconnect Time Expected Digits Delete Digits...
  • Page 340 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-162 PC Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Type trunk block no. Type the line/trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Type trunk block no.
  • Page 341 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-163 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Block Assignment. Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 342 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-164 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter the trunk number. x = block entered in Step 4 Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 343 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-165 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the DID trunks associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select Assign or remove the trunk.
  • Page 344 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-166 Procedure: DID Trunk Type Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select DID. Select Type. Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 345 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-167 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Specify immediate-start or wink-start. x = block number entered in Step 4 Select Continue to specify trunk type for the other trunk block or go to Step 8.
  • Page 346 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-168 Console Procedure Dial trunk no. Drop Dial no. of ms PC Procedure Type trunk no. Type no. of ms Procedure:Disconnect Time Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
  • Page 347 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-169 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the DID trunk. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ] Save your entry.
  • Page 348 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-170 Expected Digits Use this procedure to tell the system how many digits are sent by the local telephone company. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, if the dialed digits received on a DID...
  • Page 349 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-171 Procedure: Expected Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select DID. Select Expected Digits. Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 350 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-172 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Erase the current number of expected digits ( n ). x = block entered in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 351 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-173 Delete Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits to be deleted from the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is greater than the number in the system numbering plan.
  • Page 352 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-174 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select DID. Select Delete Digit. Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 353 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-175 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of digits to delete ( n = 0 to 4). Dial or type [ n ]. Continue to specify delete digits for the other trunk block or go to Step 9.
  • Page 354 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-176 Add Digits Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits that must be added to the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number of digits sent by the telephone company is fewer than the number in the system numbering plan.
  • Page 355 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-177 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select DID. Select Add Digits. Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2 ). Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 356 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-178 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of added digits ( nnn ). x = block entered in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 357 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-179 Summary: Signaling Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not Required Planning Form Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID Factory Setting Rotary Valid Entries Rotary, Touch-tone...
  • Page 358 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-180 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Signaling. Enter the trunk block ( n = 1 or 2). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 359 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-181 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. Invalid Destination Use this procedure to specify where to direct outside calls (received on DID trunks) for unassigned extension numbers.
  • Page 360 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures DID Trunks Page 3-182 Procedure: Invalid Destination Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select DID. Select Invalid Destination. Specify how to handle calls directed to an invalid destination. Select...
  • Page 361 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-183 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. PRI Facilities The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following options for Primary Rate Interface (PRI) facilities connected to a 100D (DS1) module: Switch Type...
  • Page 362 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-184 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: If you are adding PRI facilities to an existing system, certain values must be set correctly. To inspect or change these values, see “DS1 Facilities”...

  • Page 363: Pri Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-185 The following rules apply to PRI tandem trunks in PBX or network mode: A single unused B-channel group number is automatically assigned to all 23 B-channels on the trunk;...
  • Page 364 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-186 Procedure: Switch Type Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select Switch Type. Enter the slot number in the control unit ( ss = 1 to 17). Dial or type: Slot number [ ss ]...
  • Page 365 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-187 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Specify the switch type. Press the button or function key next to your selection.
  • Page 366 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-188 Console Procedure Dial trunk no. Drop Dial telephone no. PC Procedure Type trunk no. Type telephone no. Procedure: Telephone Number Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
  • Page 367 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-189 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the line number. Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Slot and port number [ sspp ] Logical ID number [ nnn ]...

  • Page 368: B-Channel Groups

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-190 B-Channel Groups Use this procedure to perform the following: Assign B-channels to a group. Associate individual ISDN channels (that can place and receive calls) on the B-channels in each group.
  • Page 369 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-191 Summary: B-Channel Groups Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX, Key Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 370 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-192 Procedure: B-Channel Groups Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select B-Channel Groups. Select B-Channels.
  • Page 371 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-193 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 372 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-194 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Lines. Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80 ). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 373 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-195 Single Line Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify entry mode. Select Enter a line number. xx = number entered in Step 12 Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 374 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-196 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console. Select Assign the line(s) to the B-channel group.
  • Page 375 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-197 Summary: Network Service Programmable by System Manager Mode. Hybrid/PBX, Key Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 376 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-198 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select B-Channel Groups. Select Network Service. Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80 ). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 377 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-199 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a network service. If you select , go to AT&T Toll Procedure. If you select , go to 5ESS Local Procedure.
  • Page 378 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-200 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a 5ESS local service. xx = number entered in Step 5 Select , or Save your entry.
  • Page 379 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-201 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select four times. Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a service.
  • Page 380 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-202 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Repeat Steps 5 through 7 of the main procedure for each miscellaneous service group number. Return to the System Programming menu. Select four times.
  • Page 381 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-203 Copy Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to indicate whether or not the telephone number to send to the network (for calls going out over ISDN lines assigned to a B-channel group) is copied from the number assigned to that channel.
  • Page 382 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-204 Procedure: Copy Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select B-Channel Groups. Select Copy Number.
  • Page 383 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-205 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80) . Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 384 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-206 Incoming Routing Use this procedure to specify whether incoming routing is either by line appearance or according to dial plan. Dial Plan Routing is available in Hybrid/PBX mode only.
  • Page 385 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-207 Procedure: Incoming Routing Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select B-Channel Groups. Select Incoming Routing.
  • Page 386 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-208 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the B-channel group number ( nn = 1 to 80 ). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 387 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-209 Telephone Number to Send Use this procedure to assign the telephone number to send to the network when outgoing calls are made on an ISDN line. If the person being called subscribes to an automatic number identification service, the number indicates who is calling.
  • Page 388 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-210 Procedure: Telephone Number to Send Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select Number to Send. Specify the type of number to send.
  • Page 389 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-211 Base Number with Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current base number ( N ). Press Drop. Enter a base telephone number of up to 12 digits ( N = any combination of 0 to 9).
  • Page 390 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-212 Line Telephone Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the line number ( nnn ). Dial or type [ nnn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 391 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-213 Test Telephone Number Use this procedure to assign a test line or trunk telephone number for each 100D module installed in the control unit. The number assigned to the test line/trunk must be different from the numbers assigned to other channels in the same B-channel group.
  • Page 392 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-214 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select PRI. Select Test Telephone Number. Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 393 The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and threshold settings for your PRI lines and trunks, check with your Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change. Incorrect settings can cause your PRI lines and trunks to malfunction.
  • Page 394 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-216 The timers and counters are listed below. T200 Timer. Times the delay in the link layer acknowledgment of a message sent from the system to the network over a D-channel. T203 Timer.
  • Page 395 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-217 Summary: Timers and Counters Programmable by. System Manager Mode. Idle Condition. Not required Planning Form. Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Table 3–3 Valid Entries...
  • Page 396 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-218 Procedure: Timers and Counters Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select Protocol. Select Timers.
  • Page 397 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-219 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 398 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-220 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current setting. Press Drop. Enter the new setting (see Table 3–3). Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Continue to assign the setting to another slot or go to Step 11.
  • Page 399 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-221 Terminal Equipment Identifier Use this procedure to assign the link layer address of a piece of equipment connected to each D-channel. Normally, only one piece is connected and the system assumes that the Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) is 0.
  • Page 400 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-222 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select PRI. Select Protocol. Select TEI. Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains the 100D module ( nn = 1 to 17).
  • Page 401 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-223 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Erase the current identification number ( nn ). xx = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop.
  • Page 402 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-224 Dial Plan Routing Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls on a “per B-channel group” basis. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number (by service, number of digits, and pattern) and then optionally deleting and/or adding digits to direct the call to a specific endpoint.
  • Page 403 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-225 Summary: Dial Plan Routing Programmable by. System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Service: empty;...
  • Page 404 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-226 To specify Total Digits: Type entry no. Type digits To specify Delete Digits: Type entry no. Type delete digits To specify Add Digits: Type entry no.
  • Page 405 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-227 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Service. must be programmed. Continue with Step 5. Then program other options. If you select , go to Patterns Procedure.
  • Page 406 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-228 AT&T Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select an AT&T service for the B-channel group. xx = number entered in Step 5 Press the button or function key next to your selection.
  • Page 407 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-229 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a service for the B-channel group. xx = number entered in Step 5 Press the button or function key next to your selection.
  • Page 408 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-230 MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a miscellaneous service. xx = number entered in Step 5 Select Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3. Select Return to Step 1.
  • Page 409 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-231 Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select a miscellaneous service. = number entered in Step 5 Select , or Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3. Select Return to Step 1.
  • Page 410 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-232 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure or go to Step 9. Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 411 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-233 Patterns Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the entry number ( nn = 0 to 15). Leave field blank to match any pattern. Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 412 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-234 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure or go to Step 8. Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 413 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-235 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6. Select Return to Step 3. The next dial plan routing entry is displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 414 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-236 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of delete digits ( nn ). xx = number entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 415 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-237 Add Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the entry number ( nn = 0 to 15). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 416 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-238 Outgoing Tables PRI provides tables that work in conjunction with personal lines, pools, and ARS tables to route calls. The following tables specify services for outgoing calls: Call-by-Call.
  • Page 417 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-239 Summary: Network Selection Tables Programmable by System Manager Mode Key and Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 418 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-240 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Outgoing Tables. Select Network Selection tables. Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 3). Dial or type [ n ].

  • Page 419: Special Services Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-241 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current dial prefix ( n ). x = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop. Enter the dial prefix.
  • Page 420 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-242 Summary: Special Services Tables Programmable by System Manager Mode Key and Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity (100D module) Factory Setting Table 3–4 Valid Entries...
  • Page 421 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-243 Table 3–4. Special Services Table Pattern Delete Digits Table (up to 4 digits) Operator (0 to 4) none Local Operator Local Operator Local Operator/ Presubscribed Carrier...
  • Page 422 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-244 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Outgoing Tables. Select the Special Services tables. Select an option. If you select , go to Pattern Procedure.
  • Page 423 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-245 Pattern Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 424 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-246 Operator Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 425 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-247 Type Of Number Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 426 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-248 Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( n = 0 to 7). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 427 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-249 Call-by-Call Service Table When a call is placed on a Call-by-Call B-channel group, a specific service is selected. The selected service depends on the match between the dialed digits and the table entries.
  • Page 428 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-250 Valid Entries Pattern: up to eight digits Call Type: voice, data, both Service: AT&T Toll, 5ESS Local, MCI Toll, DMS-100 Local, Miscellaneous Delete Digits: 0 to 8 Inspect...
  • Page 429 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-251 Procedure: Call-by-Call Service Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select PRI. Select Outgoing Tables. Select Call-by-Call Service.
  • Page 430 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-252 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select an option. If you select , go to Patterns Procedure. If you select , go to Voice/Data Procedure.
  • Page 431 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-253 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter a pattern of up to eight digits ( n = 0 to 9). Dial or type [ n ]. Assign a pattern to the next table or go to Step 6.
  • Page 432 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-254 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify voice, data, or both. x = number entered in Step 1 Select , or Assign to another CBC services list or go to Step 5. Select Return to Step 3.
  • Page 433 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-255 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a Network Service. If you select , go to AT&T Toll Procedure. If you select , go to.
  • Page 434 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-256 5ESS Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a local service. x = number entered in Step 1 of the Network Service Procedure.
  • Page 435 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-257 MCI Toll Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify an MCI Toll service. x = number entered in Step 1 of the Network Service Procedure.
  • Page 436 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-258 Miscellaneous Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a service. x = number entered in Step 1 of the Network Service Procedure. Select If you select , you have...
  • Page 437 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-259 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select four times. DMS-100 Local Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify a DMS-100 Local service.
  • Page 438 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures PRI Facilities Page 3-260 Delete Digits Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the list number ( n = 0 to 9). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry.

  • Page 439: Bri Facilities

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 3-261 BRI Facilities The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following options for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) facilities connected to an 800 NI-BRI module: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN) Timers...
  • Page 440 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 3-262 Procedure: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN) Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More.
  • Page 441 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 3-263 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN). Select Enter the line/trunk number ( nnn = 1 to 80). Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 442 The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and threshold settings for your BRI lines and trunks, check with your Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change. Incorrect settings can cause your BRI lines and trunks to malfunction.
  • Page 443 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 3-265 T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a disconnect message to clear a call. T308 Timer.
  • Page 444 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 3-266 Procedure: Timers Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu. Press More.
  • Page 445 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures BRI Facilities Page 3-267 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Timers. Select the timer to change. Erase the current setting. Press Drop. Enter the new setting (see Table 3–5).

  • Page 446: Extensions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-268 Extensions This section contains the following procedures: Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging). Copying line button assignments from one extension to either an individual extension or a block of extensions.
  • Page 447 (such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. Pool buttons cannot be assigned to or removed from extensions unless the pool has trunks assigned.
  • Page 448 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-270 Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Extensions Programmable by System Manager Mode All, but note differences in factory settings. Idle Condition Extension idle Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone...
  • Page 449 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-271 Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk: Dial ext. no. Dial line/trunk no. To program a block of lines/trunks: Dial ext. no. Select trunk range Toggle LED On/Off PC Procedure...
  • Page 450 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-272 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 451 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-273 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the specified line/trunk number. Select You may continue to assign or remove lines/ trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3. Assign a single line/trunk to the next extension or go to Step 5.
  • Page 452 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-274 Copy Line/Trunk Assignments Use this procedure to copy outside line/trunk button assignments, pool dial-out code restrictions (Hybrid/PBX only), and (for operator positions only) Night Service information from one extension to another extension or block of extensions with identical requirements.
  • Page 453 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-275 PC Procedure To copy to a single extension: Type copy from ext. no. Type copy to ext. no. To copy to a block of extensions: Type copy from ext.
  • Page 454 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-276 Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension you want to copy from. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select Specify the extension to copy assignments to.
  • Page 455 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-277 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension you want to copy from. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select Enter the logical ID of the first extension number in the block to be copied to.
  • Page 456 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-278 Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Use this procedure to assign or change the assignments for Intercom (ICOM) buttons used to make and receive inside calls. This includes the following types of Intercom buttons: Ring Voice...
  • Page 457 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-279 Shared SA buttons cannot be assigned to single-line telephones or other tip/ring equipment connected to an 016 T/R, 012 T/R, or 008 OPT module. Shared SA buttons can be assigned to a tip/ring or external alert device connected to an MFM in an MLX telephone or a GPA connect to an analog multiline telephone.
  • Page 458 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-280 Hybrid/PBX Mode. System Access Ring (SA Ring), System Access Voice (SA Voice), and System Access Originate Only Ring (SA Orig Only) buttons are assigned to all analog multiline and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions.
  • Page 459 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-281 Procedure: Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Press More.

  • Page 460: Programming Codes For Assigning Buttons

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-282 Table 3–6 provides the programming codes for assigning Ring and Voice buttons. You can handle errors in data entry as follows: If you enter a feature code incorrectly while programming, the display shows the message and the red LED next to the...
  • Page 461 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-283 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify an extension. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select Select Start. xx = extension entered in Step 1 Select the line buttons associated with the 20 line buttons on the system programming console or PC.
  • Page 462 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-284 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the programming code for voice or ring button. =contents of button selected in Step 5 (Voice, Ring, or blank) Table 3–6.
  • Page 463 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-285 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Enter the extension to copy to. xxxx = extension entered in Step 1 SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 464 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-286 Analog Multiline Telephone without Built-in Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) Capability Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane buttons that do not have BIS or HFAI capability.
  • Page 465 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-287 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones without BIS or HFAI Capability Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Select BIS/HFAI. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 466 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-288 Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to be used to provide the Voice Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone.
  • Page 467 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-289 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice Announce to Busy Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Select Voice Signal. Specify the first extension (odd numbered) of the pair. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 468 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Extensions Page 3-290 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether or not the extension is paired for Voice Announce to Busy. Select You may continue to assign or remove the Voice Announce to Busy feature to additional extensions by repeating Steps 3 and 4.

  • Page 469: Auxiliary Equipment

    [such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI)]. Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer. Only one Music on Hold line/trunk jack is allowed per system.

  • Page 470: Auxiliary Equipment

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-292 Summary: Music on Hold Programmable by. System Manager Mode. All, but in Hybrid/PBX mode the line/trunk designated for Music on Hold cannot be assigned to a line/trunk pool. Idle Condition System idle Planning Form...

  • Page 471: Loudspeaker Paging

    (such as ASCAP or BMI). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer. A maximum of three single-zone or multizone loudspeaker paging systems can be connected to the system.
  • Page 472 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-294 Summary: Loudspeaker Paging Programmable by System Manager Mode. All, but in Hybrid/PBX mode the line/trunk designated for loudspeaker paging cannot be assigned to a line/trunk pool. Idle Condition.
  • Page 473 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-295 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the line/trunk. If the line/trunk appears on the screen and you want to remove the loudspeaker assignment, go to Step 4.
  • Page 474 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-296 Summary: Fax Machines Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 475 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-297 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Fax. Select Extension. Specify the extension to be used for the fax machine. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 476 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-298 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Message Waiting. Enter the extension for the fax machine that is to send the message-waiting indication. SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 477 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-299 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the extension to receive the message-waiting indication. Select You may continue to assign or remove message- waiting indication to additional extensions by repeating Steps 10 and 11.

  • Page 478: Maintenance Alarms

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-300 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. Maintenance Alarms Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack that connects an external alerting device that sounds or flashes when major maintenance problems occur.
  • Page 479 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-301 Procedure: Maintenance Alarms Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu. Select Maintenance Alarms. Enter the line/trunk jack to which the maintenance alarm is connected. Dial or type: Trunk number [ OOO ] Slot and port number [ sspp ]...
  • Page 480 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-302 Voice Messaging System and Automated Attendant Use this procedure to specify the touch-tone duration and the interval between digits in codes sent between a voice messaging system and the communications system.
  • Page 481 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-303 Console Procedure Drop Dial no. of rings Drop Dial no. of ms Drop Dial no. of ms PC Procedure Type no. of rings Type no.
  • Page 482 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-304 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current interval setting ( x ). Press Drop. Enter the number of rings before calls are transferred to the backup position ( n = 0 to 9).
  • Page 483 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Auxiliary Equipment Page 3-305 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the touch-tone duration in milliseconds ( nnn = 50 to 200). Dial or type [ nnn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 484 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 3-306 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Release 5.0 and later supports the use of an MLX port as a Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) link.

  • Page 485: Computer Telephony Integration (Cti) Link

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 3-307 When you add a CTI link, the system performs the following actions: The programmed buttons for that extension revert to the factory settings for a non-operator MLX telephone.
  • Page 486 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 3-308 Console Procedure Busy out the board first. This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the main menu, not the System Programming screen.
  • Page 487 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 3-309 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension number. If you enter an invalid extension number you see an error screen as shown in “CTI Link Programming Errors”...
  • Page 488 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 3-310 Not on MLX Port Module This message appears if you have chosen an extension that is not on an MLX Port Module.
  • Page 489 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link Page 3-311 Port Reserved for Operator Positions This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI link is on the Operator Position list (as a QCC or DLC).

  • Page 490: Optional Extension Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-312 Optional Extension Features The summaries in this section detail the steps in programming the following optional features: Extension Language Pool Dial-Out Code Calling Restrictions Copy Calling Restrictions...
  • Page 491 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-313 Extension Language Use this procedure to change the language for an MLX telephone. It applies to Releases 1.1 and later only. Summary: Extension Language Programmable by Users and system manager...
  • Page 492 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-314 Procedure: Extension Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Select More. Select Language.
  • Page 493 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-315 Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension number. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 494 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-316 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the starting extension number. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select Enter the ending extension number.
  • Page 495 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-317 Pool Dial-Out Code Use this procedure to allow or restrict dialing pool dial-out codes and the placing of calls on specific line/trunk pools. Beginning with Release 3.1, the factory settings restrict all extensions from dialing any line/trunk pool dial-out code.
  • Page 496 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-318 Procedure: Pool Dial-Out Code Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Select Dial-Out Code. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 497 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-319 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the pool dial-out code. xxxx = extension entered in Step 3 Dial or type [ nnn ]. Allow or restrict the extension from using the pool dial-out code.
  • Page 498 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-320 Calling Restrictions Use this procedure to change individual extension calling restrictions to one of the following: Unrestricted Restricted from making all outgoing calls Restricted from making toll calls SECURITY ALERT Toll fraud can occur if extensions are not properly restricted.
  • Page 499 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-321 Procedure: Calling Restrictions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Select Restrictions. Specify the extension. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
  • Page 500 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-322 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the appropriate restriction. xxxx = number entered in Step 3 = remove all restrictions. = restrict extension from making outside calls (local and toll).
  • Page 501 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-323 The extensions you are copying to and from can be both operator and nonoperator positions. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Dial-out code restrictions are not copied. Summary: Copy Calling Restrictions Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 502 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-324 Procedure: Copy Calling Restrictions Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Select Restrict Copy. Specify whether to copy calling restrictions to an individual extension or to a block of extensions.
  • Page 503 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-325 Single Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
  • Page 504 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-326 Block Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
  • Page 505 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-327 ARS Restriction Level for Extensions Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Outgoing calls can be made only to routes that have a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) lower than or equal to that of the extension for which the call is being made.
  • Page 506 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-328 Procedure: Assigning ARS Restriction Level For an Extension Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 507 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-329 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current Restriction Level (x). xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Press Drop. Enter the restriction level ( n = 0 to 6).
  • Page 508 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-330 Forced Account Code Entry Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this feature is programmed on individual extensions, the user must enter a 1- to 16-digit account code before making an outside call.
  • Page 509 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-331 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Forced Account Code Entry. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 510 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-332 Microphone Operation Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the speakerphone to conduct conversations.
  • Page 511 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-333 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More. Select Microphone Disable. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 512 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-334 Authorization Codes The Authorization Code feature allows you to pick up someone else’s telephone, enter your authorization code, and complete a call with the restrictions that apply to your own telephone ( home extension ) .
  • Page 513 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-335 Procedure: Authorization Codes Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 514 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-336 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current authorization code ( xxxxxxxxxxx ). xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Press Drop.
  • Page 515 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-337 Remote Call Forwarding Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability, which permits users to forward calls to an outside number. In Release 6.0 and later systems, Remote Call Forwarding must be enabled in order for an extension user to activate Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding.
  • Page 516 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-338 Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure More Toggle LED On/Off or Dial ext. no. PC Procedure Toggle letter On/Off or type ext. no. Procedure: Remote Call Forwarding Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 517 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-339 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 518 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-340 Delayed Call Forwarding Delayed Call Forwarding allows a user to answer or screen a call arriving at an extension before the call is forwarded through Call Forwarding, Remote Call Forwarding, or Follow Me.
  • Page 519 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-341 Procedure: Delayed Call Forwarding Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 520 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-342 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of delay rings (x). xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 Press Drop or Backspace.
  • Page 521 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-343 Summary: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone Form 4d, MLX Telephone Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment...
  • Page 522 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-344 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Press More twice. Select Trunk to Trunk Transfer. Specify the extension.
  • Page 523 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-345 Primary Cover Ring Delay The Primary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1. Use this procedure to specify the following: The delay before a Primary Cover button programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly...
  • Page 524 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-346 Procedure: Primary Cover Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Press More twice.
  • Page 525 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-347 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 526 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-348 Secondary Cover Ring Delay The Secondary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1. Use this procedure to specify the delay in addition to the fixed Secondary Coverage Delay Interval (two rings) before a Secondary Cover button programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly.
  • Page 527 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-349 Procedure: Secondary Cover Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Press More twice.
  • Page 528 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-350 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 529 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-351 Group Coverage Ring Delay The Group Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1. Use this procedure to specify the following: The number of rings before sending calls to Group Coverage when the sender does not have Primary or Secondary Coverage or the receivers are...
  • Page 530 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-352 Procedure: Group Coverage Ring Delay Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Press More twice.
  • Page 531 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-353 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the sender’s extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 532 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-354 HotLine Use this procedure to enable or disable the HotLine feature on a single-line telephone set or device. Summary: HotLine Programmable by System Manager Mode...
  • Page 533 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-355 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select HotLine. Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 534 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-356 Display Preference In Release 6.0 and later systems, use this procedure to specify display preferences for incoming inside calls or non-local dial plan calls that arrive on PRI tandem trunks.
  • Page 535 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-357 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu. Press More twice. Select Display Preference. Specify the extension.
  • Page 536 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-358 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select If you select to assign a display preference to the next extension in a sequence, repeat Step 5.
  • Page 537 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-359 Console Procedure To assign a Service Observer to a Service Observing group: More More Dial group no. Dial ext. no. of Service Observer To enable or disable Warning Tone on a per group basis: More...
  • Page 538 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-360 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Service Observing. Select an option. To assign an Observer to a Service Observing group, select go to Assign a Service Observer Procedure.
  • Page 539 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-361 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the Observer extension number. xx = group number entered in Step 1 SP: “Entering an Extension” Assign or remove the Observer from the Service Observing group.
  • Page 540 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-362 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Turn Warning Tone On or Off. xx = group number entered in Step 1 Select Yes to turn Warning tone on. Select No to turn Warning tone off.
  • Page 541 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Extension Features Page 3-363 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the extension from the Service Observing group. Select You may continue to assign or remove Members to/from Service Observing groups by repeating Steps 1 through 3.

  • Page 542: Optional Operator Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-364 Optional Operator Features The summaries in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC operator positions and include the following: Operator Hold Timer DLC Operator Automatic Hold QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
  • Page 543 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-365 Procedure: Operator Hold Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. Select Hold Timer. Erase the current hold timer setting ( xxx ). Press Drop.
  • Page 544 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-366 DLC Operator Automatic Hold Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental call disconnection.
  • Page 545 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Operator Features Page 3-367 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether to enable or disable automatic hold. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select...

  • Page 546: Qcc Optional Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-368 QCC Optional Features This section contains programming summaries for the following options for QCC operator positions: Hold Return Automatic Hold or Release Queue over Threshold Elevate Priority Calls-in-Queue Alert...
  • Page 547 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-369 Summary: Hold Return Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting Calls remain on hold Valid Entries...
  • Page 548 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-370 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Hold Return. Specify whether calls on hold return to the QCC queue or remain on hold when the hold timer expires twice.
  • Page 549 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-371 Valid Entries Auto Hold, Auto Release Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure PC Procedure Procedure: Automatic Hold or Release Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu.
  • Page 550 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-372 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether in-progress calls are automatically put on hold or disconnected when another Call button is pressed. Select Save your entry.
  • Page 551 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-373 Queue over Threshold Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold has been reached or exceeded.
  • Page 552 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-374 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Threshold. Erase the current threshold ( xx ) . Press Drop. Enter the maximum number of calls allowed in QCC queue before operators are notified ( nn = 0 to 99).
  • Page 553 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-375 Elevate Priority Use this procedure to specify the length of time before calls waiting in the QCC queue are automatically reprioritized to a higher level. If priority is set to 0, calls are not prioritized.
  • Page 554 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-376 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. Select Elevate Priority. Erase the current call priority ( xx ) . Press Drop.
  • Page 555 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-377 Calls-In-Queue Alert Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue. Summary: Calls-In-Queue Alert Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 556 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-378 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select In-Queue Alert. Enter the QCC extension to receive the calls-in-queue alert. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 557 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-379 QCC Operator to Receive Call Types Use this procedure to specify which QCC operators receive the following types of calls: Dial 0 calls (internal calls to the system operator) DID calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension numbers)
  • Page 558 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-380 Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 6a, Optional Operator Features Factory Setting QCC operator receives the following calls:...
  • Page 559 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-381 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Call Types. Select a call type. To use , see “Call Type Queue Priority Level” on page 3–384.
  • Page 560 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-382 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Specify the operator position. Ã xx = number entered in Step 6 If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 561 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-383 Call Type Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Operator. = option name selected in Step 4 Specify the operator position. = option name selected in Step 4 If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 562 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-384 Call Type Queue Priority Level Use this procedure to assign a priority value (1 to 7) that determines the order in which calls programmed to ring into the QCC queue are sent to QCC system operator positions.
  • Page 563 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-385 Procedure: Call Type Queue Priority Level Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. Select Queued Call. Select Call Types. Select a call type.
  • Page 564 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-386 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Priority. = option name selected in Step 4 If you did not select , go to Step 8.
  • Page 565 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-387 Message Center Operation Use this procedure to designate one or more QCC operator positions to operate as a message center. The following options are automatically set for the message center position: Incoming calls are not directed to this position.
  • Page 566 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-388 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. Select Message Center. Specify the QCC operator extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 567 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-389 Extended (Directed) Call Completion Use this procedure to specify one of the two basic options shown below for QCC operator positions with a DSS only: Automatic Completion.
  • Page 568 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-390 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. Select Extended Completion. Specify automatic call extension or require the operator to extend calls manually. Select Save your entry.
  • Page 569 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-391 Return Ring Use this procedure to specify the number of rings before an unanswered directed call is returned to the QCC queue or QCC Message Center position. This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions.
  • Page 570 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-392 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. Select Return Ring. Erase the current number of rings ( xx ). Press Drop.
  • Page 571 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-393 Position Busy Backup Use this procedure to designate or remove the calling group to provide the backup position for the QCC queue. The specified calling group receives incoming calls when all QCC operator positions are in position-busy mode.
  • Page 572 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-394 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Queued Call. Go to the second screen of the Queued Call Operator menu. Press More. Select QCC Backup.
  • Page 573 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-395 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the calling group to provide QCC operator backup. SP: “Entering an Extension” Assign or remove the group as QCC operator backup. Select You may continue to assign or remove calling groups as QCC operator backups by repeating...
  • Page 574 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-396 Copy Option Console Procedure More PC Procedure Procedure: Position Busy Backup Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Operator menu. Select Queued Call.
  • Page 575 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures QCC Optional Features Page 3-397 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Enabled or Disabled. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select two times.
  • Page 576 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-398 Optional Group Features This section contains programming summaries for the following optional features: Pickup Groups Group Paging Group Coverage Member Assignments Group Coverage Delay Interval (Release 4.0 and earlier) Group Calling Member Assignments Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments...
  • Page 577 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-399 Procedure: Pickup Groups Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Select Call Pickup. Enter the number of the pickup group ( nn = 1 to 30). Dial or type [ nn ].

  • Page 578: Optional Group Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-400 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. xx = number entered in Step 3 If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 579 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-401 Summary: Group Paging Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7b, Group Paging Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Extension number...
  • Page 580 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-402 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Page. Enter the extension number of the paging group. “System Renumbering” on page 3–20 for the factory-set extension numbers assigned to paging groups.
  • Page 581 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-403 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another paging group or go to Step 9. Select Return to Step 6 to continue programming.
  • Page 582 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-404 Summary: Group Coverage Member Assignments3 Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7c, Group Coverage Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 583 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-405 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Coverage. Enter the number of the coverage group ( nn = 1 to 30). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 584 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-406 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another coverage group or go to Step 9. Select Return to Step 6 to continue programming.
  • Page 585 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-407 Procedure: Group Coverage Delay Interval Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More.
  • Page 586 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-408 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select Group Calling Member Assignments Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension to or from a calling group.
  • Page 587 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-409 Copy Option Console Procedure More Dial calling group ext. no. Dial ext. no. PC Procedure Type calling group ext. no. Type ext.
  • Page 588 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-410 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Members. Enter the extension number of the calling group. “System Renumbering” on page 3–20 for the factory setting for extension numbers assigned to calling groups.
  • Page 589 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-411 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign the extension to another calling group or go to Step 10. Select Return to Step 7 to continue programming.
  • Page 590 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-412 Procedure: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 591 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Features Page 3-413 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. Dial or type [ nnnn ] . Save your entry. Select Enter the line/trunk or pool number.

  • Page 592: Optional Group Calling Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-414 Optional Group Calling Features This section includes programming summaries for the following optional group calling features: Hunt Type Group Calling Delay Announcements Group Calling Announcement Interval Group Calling Repeat Announcement...
  • Page 593 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-415 Summary: Hunt Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting Circular hunting pattern Valid Entries...
  • Page 594 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-416 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Calling. Select Hunt Type. Enter the extension number of the calling group. Dial or type [ nnnn ] .
  • Page 595 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-417 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to assign a hunt pattern to another calling group or go to Step 9. Select Return to Step 7 to continue programming.
  • Page 596 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-418 Console Procedure More Dial calling group ext. no. Enter Extension number of Announcement device PC Procedure Type calling group ext. no. Type ext.
  • Page 597 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-419 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Delay Announcement. Enter the extension number of the calling group. SP: “Enter an extension.” Save your entry.
  • Page 598 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-420 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove a delay announcement device extension from the calling group. Select You may continue to assign or remove delay announcement device extensions from the calling group by repeating Steps 5 through 8.
  • Page 599 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-421 Procedure: Group Calling Announcement Interval Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 600 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-422 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension number of the calling group. SP: ‘Enter an extension.” Save your entry. Select Select Announcement Interval.
  • Page 601 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-423 Group Calling Repeat Announcement Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the Announcement Interval. Summary: Group Calling Repeat Announcement Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 602 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-424 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More. Select Group Calling. Select Delay Announcement.
  • Page 603 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-425 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Repeat announcement. Enter the Yes or No. xxxx =calling group ext. no. from Step 5 Assign repeat announcement option for the calling group.
  • Page 604 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-426 Summary: Group Coverage Receiver Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7c, Group Coverage Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries...
  • Page 605 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-427 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Calling. Select Group Coverage. Enter the extension number of the calling group. Dial or type [ nnnn ].
  • Page 606 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-428 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the coverage group as the receiver for the calling group. Select You may continue to assign or remove additional coverage groups as the receiver for the calling group by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
  • Page 607 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-429 A calling group or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only) can provide overflow coverage for more than one calling group; however, which group’s calls go to an available member in the overflow calling group is unpredictable.
  • Page 608 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-430 Procedure: Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 609 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-431 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry. Select Erase the current extension of the calling group or the QCC Listed Directory Number ( xxxx ) providing coverage, if assigned.
  • Page 610 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-432 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the group or directory as overflow backup coverage. Select You may continue to assign or remove additional groups or directories as overflow backup coverage by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
  • Page 611 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-433 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Time Based Overflow. xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Erase the current timeout ( xxx ). xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop.
  • Page 612 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-434 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select to return to Step 10 or to return to Step 8. You may change the overflow receiver by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
  • Page 613 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-435 Procedure: Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 614 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-436 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry. Select Erase the current extension ( nnnn ).
  • Page 615 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-437 Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds Use this procedure to specify the number of unanswered calls that wait in the calling group queue before group members are notified with either an external alert (an external alert is turned on when the third threshold is met) or a light on the telephone.
  • Page 616 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-438 Procedure: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 617 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-439 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry. Select Select the Threshold number.
  • Page 618 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-440 Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue Alarm Use this procedure to designate the external alert device used to notify calling group members when the number of calls in the queue reaches the programmed Threshold 3.
  • Page 619 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-441 Procedure: Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue Alarm Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 620 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-442 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the extension of the calling group. Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry. Select Erase the current external alert extension ( nnnn ) if assigned.
  • Page 621 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-443 Group Type Use this procedure to determine whether or not the system automatically logs in members of a calling group after a power failure. This setting also determines the type of voice messaging interface when the calling group is used to connect voice messaging or automated attendant applications.
  • Page 622 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-444 Summary: Group Type Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 7d, Group Calling Factory Setting Automatic Log Out Valid Entries...
  • Page 623 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-445 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Group Calling. Go to the second screen of the Group Calling menu. Press More. Select Group Type.
  • Page 624 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-446 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the type of login for the group that occurs after a power failure. xxxx = number entered in Step 6 Press the button or function key next to your selection.
  • Page 625 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-447 Remote-access calls to a calling group, coverage calls directed to a calling group, and all outside/CO calls are not eligible for queue control. Queue control does not apply to calls received directly on any of the following facilities: Loop-start lines...
  • Page 626 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-448 Procedure: Queue Control Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Extensions menu. Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu. Press More.
  • Page 627 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Optional Group Calling Features Page 3-449 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Queue Control. Enter the extension number of the group. Dial or type [ nnnn ]. Save your entry.

  • Page 628: System Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-450 System Features This section contains programming summaries for the optional system features that affect all or most system users and includes the following: Transfer Return Time One-Touch Transfer/Hold Transfer Audible...
  • Page 629 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-451 Transfer Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
  • Page 630 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-452 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Transfer. Select Return Time. Erase the current number of rings ( x ). Press Drop. Enter the number of rings before a transferred call is returned to the originator ( n = 0 to 9).
  • Page 631 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-453 One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold Use this procedure to assign either the One-Touch Transfer or One-Touch Hold feature. One-Touch Transfer allows users to initiate transfers to another extension by pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button for that extension.
  • Page 632 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-454 Procedure: One-Touch Transfer/Hold Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Select Transfer. Select One Touch. Specify transfer or hold. Select...
  • Page 633 Composers, Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies. 2. In Release 6.0 and later systems, when extensions are programmed to use the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature, do not program Music On Hold as the transfer audible.
  • Page 634 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-456 Summary: Transfer Audible Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, System Features Factory Setting Music on Hold Valid Entries Music on Hold, Ringback...
  • Page 635 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-457 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Transfer Audible. Specify whether the outside caller hears music or ringing while being transferred. Select Save your entry.
  • Page 636 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-458 Copy Option Console Procedure PC Procedure Procedure: Type of Transfer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Select Transfer. Select Transfer Type.
  • Page 637 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-459 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify whether a voice or ring button is automatically selected. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice.
  • Page 638 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-460 Procedure: Camp-On Return Time Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Select Camp-On. Erase the current number of seconds ( xxx ). Press Drop.
  • Page 639 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-461 Call Park Return Time Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with the Park feature is returned to the originator.
  • Page 640 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-462 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of seconds ( xxx ). Press Drop. Enter the number of seconds before a parked call returns to the originator ( nnn = 30 to 300).
  • Page 641 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-463 Procedure: Delay Ring Interval Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Select Delay Ring. Erase the current number of rings ( x ). Press Drop.
  • Page 642 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-464 Automatic Callback Interval Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings at the originator’s telephone before the system cancels a Callback request. Summary: Automatic Callback Interval Programmable by System Manager...
  • Page 643 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-465 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Callback Interval. Erase the current number of rings ( x ). Press Drop. Enter the number of rings before the system cancels the automatic callback request ( n = 1 to 6).
  • Page 644 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-466 Extension Status Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode. The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
  • Page 645 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-467 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Extension Status. Specify the extension status mode. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select SMDR Language Use this procedure to change the language of the SMDR reports.
  • Page 646 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-468 Procedure: SMDR Language Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Press More. Select Language. Select SMDR.
  • Page 647 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-469 SMDR Call Report Format Use this procedure to specify whether the SMDR call reports are printed in Basic format or ISDN format. In ISDN format, automatic number identification (ANI) or Caller ID information appears in the Calling Number field in place of IN (which appears in the Basic report format).
  • Page 648 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-470 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. Select Call Report Format. Specify a format for the SMDR reports. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 649 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-471 SMDR Call Length Use this procedure to set the minimum time length of a call before it is recorded on SMDR call reports. NOTES: 1.
  • Page 650 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-472 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. Select Call Length. inserts a page break in the report. Erase the current number of seconds ( xxx ). Press Drop.
  • Page 651 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-473 SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for both incoming and outgoing non-private network calls or for outgoing non-private network calls only.
  • Page 652 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-474 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. Select Call Report. inserts a page break in the report. Specify whether SMDR information is recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only.
  • Page 653 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-475 SMDR Account Code Format For calls made using an authorization code, SMDR can be programmed to have either the “home extension” or the actual authorization codes recorded in the Account Code field if no Account Code is entered.
  • Page 654 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-476 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. Select Authorization Code. inserts a page break in the report. Specify whether the home extension number or the authorization code is recorded.
  • Page 655 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-477 SMDR Talk Time In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call record. The talk field is designed for the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter application that is used to capture detailed information on incoming and outgoing voice and data calls with a special emphasis on calling groups.
  • Page 656 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-478 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. Select Talk Time. Specify whether you want Talk Time enabled or disabled. Select Save your entry. Press...
  • Page 657 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-479 SMDR UDP Calls Recorded on Call Report Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for both incoming and outgoing calls on private network tandem trunks, or if call recording will not be performed on private network calls.
  • Page 658 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-480 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select SMDR. Select UDP. inserts a page break in the report. Specify whether SMDR information is recorded for both incoming and outgoing UDP calls or if UDP call information will not be recorded.
  • Page 659 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-481 Inside Dial Tone Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from, or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:...
  • Page 660 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-482 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Inside Dial Tone. Specify which dial tone you want for inside. Select Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 661 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-483 Copy Option Console Procedure To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel: Drop To set Reminder Service Cancel time: Drop Dial time PC Procedure To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel: To set Reminder Service Cancel time: Type time...
  • Page 662 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-484 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current reminder service time ( xxxx ) if assigned. Press Drop. Enter the time of day when all reminders are to be canceled ( hh = 00 to 23 and mm = 00 to 59).
  • Page 663 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-485 Summary: Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, System Features Factory Setting Extension number of primary operator Valid Entries...
  • Page 664 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-486 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More. Select Redirect Unassigned Extension Numbers. Specify where to redirect calls made to unassigned extension numbers.
  • Page 665 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-487 Extension Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension to which calls are to be redirected. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry.
  • Page 666 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-488 Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode3 Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the Transfer, Conference, and Drop features.
  • Page 667 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-489 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More. Select Behind Switch. Specify the feature to which you want to assign a dial code. Select , or Erase the current host system dial code ( xxxxxx ).
  • Page 668 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-490 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. Recall Timer Use this procedure to designate the length of the timed flash that is sent when Recall is used to disconnect a call and get a new dial tone without hanging up.
  • Page 669 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-491 Procedure: Recall Timer Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Options menu. Go to the second screen of the Options menu. Press More.

  • Page 670: System Programming Guide 555

    System Features Page 3-492 Interdigit Timers Programming for interdigit timers is reserved for Lucent Technologies technical support personnel or authorized dealers. Interdigit timers are used by the MERLIN LEGEND system to determine when a user originating an outside call has completed dialing the digits. The information is necessary to allow the system to perform subsequent operations.
  • Page 671 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-493 Procedure: Allowed Lists Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select Allowed List. Enter the list ( I = 0 to 7) and entry ( e = 0 to 9) numbers. If you do not enter a list number, List 0 is assigned.
  • Page 672 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-494 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the allowed area code/exchange (up to 6 digits). Dial or type [ n ]. Save your entry. Select to enter the next number on the list displayed on Line 1.
  • Page 673 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-495 Procedure: Assign Allowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select Allowed To List. Enter the number of the list ( n = 0 to 7). If you do not enter a list number, List 0 is assigned.
  • Page 674 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-496 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension to assign to the allowed list. x = list number entered in Step 3 If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...

  • Page 675: Disallowed Lists

    1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 676 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-498 Procedure: Disallowed Lists Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select Disallowed List. Specify the list ( I = 0 to 7 ) and entry ( e = 0 to 9) numbers. If you do not enter a list number, List 0 is assigned.
  • Page 677 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-499 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the disallowed telephone number (n = up to 12 digits). Dial or type [ n ]. Continue to assign the next telephone number to the disallowed list or go to Step 8.
  • Page 678 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-500 Procedure: Assign Disallowed Lists to Extensions Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select Disallow To Lists. Enter the list number ( n = 0 to 7). Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 679 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures System Features Page 3-501 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension to which you want to assign the disallowed list. x = list number entered in Step 3 If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...

  • Page 680: Remote Access Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-502 Remote Access Features This section covers the following Remote Access features: Remote Access over Networked Tandem and Tie Trunks (Release 6.0 and later systems only) Remote Access Trunk Assignment Remote Access Automatic Callback...
  • Page 681 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 682 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-504 Remote Access over Networked Tandem PRI and Tie Trunks In Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only, an ARS call originating at a remote, private networked communications system can arrive on a networked tandem tie or PRI trunk of the local system and receive remote-access treatment automatically.
  • Page 683 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-505 Specify that all tie trunks (that is, networked tandem tie trunks) and/or all non-tie trunks (that is, all PRI tandem trunks) will not require barrier codes. This does not affect calls dialing the remote access code if the trunks on the remote system are regular, assigned remote-access trunks accessed by remote access users on your own system.
  • Page 684 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-506 Summary: Remote Access Trunk Assignment Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access Factory Setting Remote Access is not assigned Valid Entries...
  • Page 685 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-507 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Lines and Trunks. Enter the line/trunk for remote access usage ( nnnn ). Dial or type: Trunk number [ nnn ] Logical ID number [nnnn] Save your entry.
  • Page 686 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-508 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. Remote Access Automatic Callback Use this procedure either to allow remote access users to use the Automatic Callback feature to request busy lines/trunks or pools or to prevent use of the Automatic Callback feature.
  • Page 687 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-509 Procedure: Remote Access Automatic Callback Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Lines and Trunks menu. Select Remote Access. Specify Automatic Callback (queuing). Allow or disallow use of the Automatic Callback feature by remote access users.
  • Page 688 SECURITY ALERT Your system will be highly susceptible to toll fraud if you activate the Remote Access feature without barrier codes. Lucent Technologies does not recommend doing this except in cases where your remote-access trunks are being used by external users connected to a system that is in a private network with your own (Release 6.0 and later).
  • Page 689 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-511 Allowed Lists Assignment. Assigns Allowed Lists and is used when remote access users are restricted from making local or toll calls. Disallowed Lists Assignment.
  • Page 690 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-512 To change ARS Facility Restriction Level: Type FRL value To assign/remove Allowed Lists: Type list no. To assign/remove Disallowed Lists: Type list no.
  • Page 691 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-513 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Specify whether you are establishing/removing a class of restrictions for non-tie lines/trunks or for tie and DID trunks. Select Select an option.
  • Page 692 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-514 Restriction Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the restriction type. Select , or Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select three times.
  • Page 693 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-515 Allowed or Disallowed Lists Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the list you want to assign ( n = 0 to 7). = option name selected in Step 3 = option name selected in Step 5 Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 694 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-516 SECURITY ALERT Always use the longest length barrier code allowed on the system. Barrier codes should consist of a random, non-repetitive, hard-to-guess sequence of digits.
  • Page 695 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-517 Console Procedure To establish or remove code requirements: Specify whether barrier codes are required To change barrier code length: Drop Dial code length To change barrier code:...
  • Page 696 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-518 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Remote Access. Select an option. Select to specify whether barrier codes apply to non-tie or tie trunks and go to Establish or Remove Barrier Code Requirements Procedure.
  • Page 697 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-519 Establish or Remove Barrier Code Requirements Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Barrier Code. = option name selected in Step 3 Specify barrier code requirement.
  • Page 698 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-520 Change Barrier Code Length Procedure When the systemwide barrier code length is changed, all barrier codes are erased and must be reassigned. Users are denied access to remote access trunks until new barrier codes are assigned.
  • Page 699 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-521 Change Barrier Code Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the barrier code ID number ( nn = 1 to 16). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 700 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-522 Remote Access with Barrier Codes Use this procedure to change the class of restriction for individual remote access barrier codes. The class of restriction assigned to each barrier code allows or denies the use of the following system features: Restriction.
  • Page 701 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-523 Console Procedure Dial barrier code no. Select restriction Dial barrier code Drop Dial FRL value Dial barrier code no. Dial list no.
  • Page 702 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-524 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Barrier Code Access. Select an option. To change current calling restrictions, select and go to Change Current Call Restrictions Procedure.
  • Page 703 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-525 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify a restriction. xx = barrier code number entered in Step 1 Select , or Continue to assign the restriction to another barrier code number or go to Step 5.
  • Page 704 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-526 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current ARS FRL ( n ). xx = barrier code entered in Step 1 Press Drop.
  • Page 705 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Remote Access Features Page 3-527 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Enter the number of the Allowed List or Disallowed List you want to assign or remove ( n = 0 to 7).

  • Page 706: Automatic Route Selection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-528 Automatic Route Selection This section contains programming procedures for the following Automatic Route Selection (ARS) features: 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements ARS Tables Start and Stop Times for Subpatterns Pool Routing...
  • Page 707 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-529 Local Users Calling out on Private Networked Lines To implement this operation on a local system where callers will use the trunks on a remote system, use the procedures outlined in this section.
  • Page 708 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-530 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements Use this procedure for calls placed within the same (home) area code as the system.
  • Page 709 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-531 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. Select ARS 1+7 Digit Dial. Specify whether 1+7-digit dialing is required within the home area code. Select Save your entry.
  • Page 710 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-532 ARS Tables Use this procedure for the following tasks: To specify type of table (6-digit, area code, exchange, or 1 + 7-digit number) To add or change area codes to be included in each table To add or change exchanges to be included in each table A maximum of 16 tables can be established, numbered 1 through 16.
  • Page 711 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-533 Procedure: ARS Tables Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select Automatic Route Selection. Select ARS Table Input.
  • Page 712 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-534 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the table number ( nn = 1 to 16). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.

  • Page 713: Start And Stop Times For Subpatterns

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-535 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current entry ( nnn ). xx = table number entered in Step 4 xxx = entry number entered in Step 8 Press Drop.
  • Page 714 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-536 In Release 6.0 and later systems, if you are setting up ARS to allow local users to make cost-efficient calls on trunks connected to remote systems, you may wish to check with the remote system manager to ensure that routing stipulates the most cost-effective timing based on the rates at the remote location.
  • Page 715 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-537 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. Select Subpattern B Start. Enter the table number ( nn = 1 to 18). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 716 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-538 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current start time ( xxxx ). Press Drop. Enter the start time for Subpattern B ( hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59). Dial or type [ hhmm ].

  • Page 717: Pool Routing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-539 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current stop time ( xxxx ). Press Drop. Enter the stop time for Subpattern B ( hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59). Dial or type [ hhmm ].
  • Page 718 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-540 Summary: Pool Routing Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Factory Setting...
  • Page 719 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-541 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. Select pool routing for Subpattern A or B. Select and go to Subpattern A Procedure.
  • Page 720 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-542 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls. xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Dial or type [ nnn ].

  • Page 721: Facility Restriction Level

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-543 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls. xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 722 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-544 Summary: Facility Restriction Level Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Factory Setting...
  • Page 723 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-545 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. Select Facility Restriction Level for Subpattern A or B. Select and go to Subpattern A Procedure.
  • Page 724 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-546 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the restriction level ( n = 0 to 6). xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Dial or type [ n ].

  • Page 725: Digit Absorption

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-547 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Enter the restriction level ( n = 0 to 6). xx = table number entered in Step 1 x = route number entered in Step 1 Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 726 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-548 Summary: Digit Absorption Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Factory Setting Valid Entries 0 to 11...
  • Page 727 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-549 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select absorb digits for Subpattern A or B. Select and go to Subpattern A Procedure. Press More, select and go to Subpattern B Procedure.
  • Page 728 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-550 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to enter absorbed digits for another route number for Subpattern A or go to Step 6. Select Return to Step 3.
  • Page 729 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-551 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of digits to be absorbed ( nn = 1 to 11). Dial or type [ nn ]. Continue to enter absorbed digits for another route number for Subpattern B or go to Step 6.
  • Page 730 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-552 Summary: Other Digits Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables Factory Setting Valid Entries Up to 20 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
  • Page 731 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-553 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select other digits for Subpattern A or B. Select Press More and select Enter the table ( nn = 1 to 18) and the route ( m = 1 to 6) number. x = subpattern selected in Step 3 Dial or type [ nnm ].
  • Page 732 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-554 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to specify other digits for another route in the specified subpattern or go to Step 9. Select Return to Step 6.
  • Page 733 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-555 Console Procedure To change Facility Restriction Level: More Drop Dial FRL value To program other digits: More Drop Dial digits PC Procedure To change Facility Restriction Level: Type FRL value...
  • Page 734 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-556 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. Press More. Select N11 Special Numbers Table. Select an option.
  • Page 735 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-557 Change FRL Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current restriction level ( x ). Press Drop. Enter an FRL value ( n = 0 to 6). Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 736 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-558 Dial 0 Table Use this procedure to specify pool routing, Facility Restriction Level (FRL), and Other Digits for the Dial 0 table. Only one route can be specified.
  • Page 737 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-559 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. Press More. Select Dial 0.
  • Page 738 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-560 ARS Pool Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current pool dial-out code ( xxx ). Press Drop. Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits. Dial or type [ nnn ].
  • Page 739 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-561 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select three times. ARS Digits Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current other digits ( x ).
  • Page 740 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-562 Voice and/or Data Routing Use this procedure to route voice, data, or voice and data. The voice/data specification is used mainly in conjunction with PRI. See “PRI Facilities”...
  • Page 741 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-563 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Automatic Route Selection. Go to the second screen of the ARS menu. Press More. Select Subpattern A or B.
  • Page 742 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Automatic Route Selection Page 3-564 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Select the appropriate capability. xx = table number entered in Step 5 x = route number entered in Step 5 Select , or...

  • Page 743: Uniform Dial Plan Routing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-565 Uniform Dial Plan Routing This section includes programming procedures for assigning Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Routing, available for Hybrid/PBX mode in Release 6.0 and later systems only.
  • Page 744 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-566 UDP Pool Routing Before beginning this procedure, assign tandem tie or PRI trunks to pools. To do so, see “Trunks to Pools Assignment”...
  • Page 745 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-567 Procedure: UDP Pool Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select UDP Routing. Enter the number of the pattern ( nn = 1 to 20) for the route and pool. Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 746 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-568 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 747 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-569 UDP Facility Restriction Level Use this procedure to assign a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) to each UDP route. The FRL ranges from 0 (least restrictive) to 6 (most restrictive) and prevents users from accessing the route.
  • Page 748 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-570 Procedure: UDP Route Facility Restriction Level Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select UDP Routing. Enter the number of the pattern ( nn = 1 to 20). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 749 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-571 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 750 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-572 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to enter a restriction level for another route in the pattern or go to Step 10.
  • Page 751 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-573 Summary: UDP Digit Absorption Programmable by System Manager Mode Hybrid/PBX Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Non-Local Dial Plan Administration Form in the Installation Specification Factory Setting Valid Entries...
  • Page 752 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-574 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the number of the pattern ( nn = 1 to 20). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 753 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-575 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current number of absorbed digits ( nn ). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 x = route number entered in Step 1 Press Drop or select Enter the number of digits to be absorbed ( nn = 0 to 11).
  • Page 754 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-576 UDP Other Digits Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the system to the beginning of the dialed digits when calls are placed on an identified route.
  • Page 755 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-577 Procedure: UDP Other Digits Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select UDP Routing. Enter the number of the pattern ( nn = 1 to 20). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 756 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-578 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Dial or type [ n ].
  • Page 757 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-579 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Continue to specify other digits for another route in the current pattern or go to Step 11. Select Return to Step 8.
  • Page 758 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-580 Procedure: UDP Voice and/or Data Routing Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Tables menu. Select UDP Routing. Enter the number of the pattern ( nn = 1 to 20). Dial or type [ nn ].
  • Page 759 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Uniform Dial Plan Routing Page 3-581 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter the route number ( n = 1 to 4). xx = pattern number entered in Step 3 Dial or type [ n ].

  • Page 760: Night Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-582 Night Service The procedures in this section cover how to program the following optional Night Service features: Night Service Group Assignment Night Service with Outward Restriction Night Service with Time Set Night Service with Coverage Control...
  • Page 761 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-583 To assign an extension to a Night Service group: Dial ext. no. of Night Service attendant Dial no. of extension To assign an outside line to a Night Service group: Dial ext.
  • Page 762 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-584 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select an option. Select to add an extension to a Night Service group. Select to add a calling group to a Night Service group.
  • Page 763 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-585 Extensions Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension you want to assign to the Night Service group. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”...
  • Page 764 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-586 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the calling group(s) from the Night Service group. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Select to assign or remove your entry and continue adding or...
  • Page 765 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-587 Summary: Night Service with Outward Restriction Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 9b, Night Service: Outward Restrictions Factory Setting No password Valid Entries...
  • Page 766 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-588 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current password ( xxxx ) if assigned. Press Drop. Enter a four-digit password ( n = any combination of 0 to 9). To remove the password requirement, leave the screen blank and go to Step 5.
  • Page 767 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-589 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Erase the current telephone number ( n ) if assigned. x = list item number entered in Step 7 Press Drop.
  • Page 768 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-590 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Specify the extension. If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension” If DSS is attached: Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
  • Page 769 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-591 If system programming information is being loaded into memory from a backup diskette, the current day of the week must be reset. Night Service can be turned off by using the following procedure: Dial Summary: Night Service with Time Set...
  • Page 770 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-592 Procedure: Night Service with Time Set Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Night Service menu. Select Night Service option. To add or change start time, select and go to Add or Change Start Time Procedure.
  • Page 771 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-593 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select Add or Change Stop Time Procedure Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Erase the current stop day and time ( xxxxx ) if assigned .
  • Page 772 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-594 Activate/Deactivate Night Service Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Turn Night Service On or Off. Select to turn Night Service on. Select to turn Night Service off.
  • Page 773 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Night Service Page 3-595 Valid Entries Enable or Disable Inspect Copy Option Console Procedure PC Procedure Procedure: Night Service with Coverage Control Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the Night Service menu.

  • Page 774: Labeling

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-596 Labeling The procedures in this section cover how to add or change labels for the following: Extension Directory Lines or Trunks Posted Message Group Calling System Speed Dial Directory...
  • Page 775 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-597 Summary: Extension Directory Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks Factory Setting Not applicable Valid Entries Not applicable...
  • Page 776 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-598 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Directory. Select Extension. Specify the extension you want to label. Save your entry. Select Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. xxxx = number entered in Step 5 Press Drop.
  • Page 777 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-599 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a label for the extension. to toggle between letters and punctuation. Dial or type the label. Save your entry.
  • Page 778 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-600 Procedure: Lines or Trunks Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Press More. Select the Labeling menu. Select Lines/Trunks.
  • Page 779 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-601 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. xxx = number entered in Step 4 Press Drop. Enter a label for the line or trunk.
  • Page 780 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-602 Summary: Posted Messages Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required Planning Form Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message Factory Setting First 10 messages Valid Entries 1 to 20...
  • Page 781 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-603 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Posted Message. Enter the posted message number ( nn = 1 to 20). Dial or type [ nn ]. Save your entry.
  • Page 782 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-604 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: , not Change additional messages by repeating Steps 4 through 8. Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 783 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-605 Procedure: Group Calling Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Press More. Select the Labeling menu. Select Group Calling.
  • Page 784 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-606 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. xxxx = number entered in Step 4 Press Drop. Enter a label for the calling group.
  • Page 785 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-607 System Speed Dial Directory Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users. You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
  • Page 786 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-608 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select the Labeling menu. Select Directory. Select System. Enter the speed dial code number you want to add or change ( nnn = 600 to 729).
  • Page 787 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-609 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current label ( AAAAAAA ) if assigned. xxx = code entered in Step 4 Press Drop. Enter a label for the speed dial code.
  • Page 788 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Labeling Page 3-610 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Enter a telephone number for the speed dial code entered in Step 5 ( n = up to 20 digits). Include any special characters shown on the planning form: Hold (A+H) = Pause...

  • Page 789: Print Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-611 Print Reports Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and to print the system reports. Report Language Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports.
  • Page 790 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-612 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Language. Select Printer. Specify a language for the reports. Select , or Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 791 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-613 Printing System Reports The communications system can be used to print a variety of reports. You can print individual reports or use the option to print the entire set of available reports, including all report sections and options.
  • Page 792 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-614 Operator Information — Position — General Options — DSS Options — QCC Operators — Operator Information Allowed Lists Allowed Lists Assigned to Extensions Disallowed Lists Disallowed Lists Assigned to Extensions Automatic Route Selection...
  • Page 793 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-615 If you are printing from the console, your printer must be connected to the SMDR port. If you are programming on a PC with SPM, you have the following choices: Print reports on the SMDR printer (if available) Print reports on the PC printer Save reports (on hard disk or floppy)
  • Page 794 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-616 Procedure: Printing System Reports Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Press More. Select Print.
  • Page 795 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Print Reports Page 3-617 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Observe the print progress screen. Press ) to interrupt printing and display the print menu. Return to the System Programming menu. Select Trunk Information Procedure Console Display/Instructions...

  • Page 796: Data Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Data Features Page 3-618 Data Features This section covers the programming procedure for analog multiline telephones connected by a General-Purpose Adapter (GPA) to a data terminal and modem. Other data programming procedures can be found in earlier sections of this book (see Table...
  • Page 797 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Data Features Page 3-619 Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Workstations Use this procedure to dedicate a pair of extension jacks to provide the voice and data to an analog data workstation.
  • Page 798 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Data Features Page 3-620 Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Workstations Console Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu. Press More.
  • Page 799 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Data Features Page 3-621 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the voice/data pair. Select You may continue to assign or remove additional voice/data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5. Return to the System Programming menu.
  • Page 800 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Data Features Page 3-622 Procedure: 2B Data Console Display Instructions Additional Information Go to the second screen of the system programming menu. Press More. Select Data.
  • Page 801 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Data Features Page 3-623 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Assign or remove the 2B data pair. Select You may continue to assign or remove additional 2B data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
  • Page 802 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-624 Memory Card A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory card.

  • Page 803: Pcmcia Memory Card

    Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-625 INSERT LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS. COPYRIGHT © 1993 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Figure 3–4.
  • Page 804 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-626 Inserting the Card To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow pointing toward the slot. See Figure 3–5 for the proper way to insert the memory card into the slot on the processor module.
  • Page 805 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-627 Memory Card Formatting The memory card may have to be formatted before you begin any manual or automatic backup procedures. This section details the screens and messages that appear during the format procedure.

  • Page 806: Memory Card Formatting Messages

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-628 Format Warning This screen appears if you respond to the system prompt to format the memory card. Select (or press ) to begin the memory card format.
  • Page 807 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-629 Backup Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that programmed information is not lost) and once after each system upgrade, service technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.

  • Page 808: Inserting The Memory Card

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-630 Summary: Backup Programmable by System Manager Mode Idle Condition Not required (No extensions are allowed to be in programming mode except system programming console) Planning Form Form 1, System Planning Factory Setting...
  • Page 809 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-631 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Select Backup. Select the backup filename. If you select AUTO.BACK1 AUTO.BACK2, go to Step 8. You cannot rename either of these two files.

  • Page 810: Automatic Backup

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-632 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Respond to the prompt. filename = file selected in Step 5 or entered in Step 6 Select to terminate the backup.
  • Page 811 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-633 While the backup is in progress, you cannot access system programming functions, your Personal Directory, or alarm clock functions (any programmed alarms are temporarily deactivated).
  • Page 812 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-634 PC Procedure To program daily backup: Insert memory card Type time To program weekly backup: Insert memory card Type day and time Procedure: Automatic Backup Console Display/Instructions Additional Information...
  • Page 813 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-635 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Make a selection. Select , or Save your entry. Select If you selected you have finished this procedure.
  • Page 814 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-636 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Return to the System Programming menu. Select twice. Weekly Backup Procedure Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Erase the current weekly backup day and time ( xxxxx ).
  • Page 815 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-637 Backup Messages During manual or automatic backup procedures, additional screens may appear to alert you to problems with the translation memory card, the backup file, or the backup procedure.
  • Page 816 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-638 Card Missing or Card Not Inserted Correctly The memory card is either not inserted or is inserted incorrectly. The backup is terminated.
  • Page 817 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-639 Restore Use this procedure to restore system conditions that were backed up onto a translation memory card. The information in a backup file on the translation card is copied to the system.
  • Page 818 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-640 Console Procedure Insert memory card Select restore file PC Procedure Insert memory card Select restore file Procedure: Restore Console Display Instructions Additional Information Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor module.
  • Page 819 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-641 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Inspect the backup files present on the Memory Card. Press More to view additional files. aaaaaaaaaa , bbbbbbbbb = filenames xxxx = System Programming Port MM/DD HH:MM = date and time X.Y = system software release...
  • Page 820 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-642 Console/Display Instructions Additional Information Observe the restore progress screen. n = filename selected in Step 5 Observe the restore file validation screen. n = filename selected in Step 5 The session is finished, and the system restarts.
  • Page 821 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-643 Card Removed after Confirmation The memory card was removed from the PCMCIA interface slot while the restore was in progress. The restore is aborted and the system performs a System Erase (frigid start).
  • Page 822 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-644 Card Failure Before Confirmation If the restore fails because the card is damaged, repeat the restore procedure using a different file and/or memory card. Card Failure after Confirmation n = filename selected If the restore fails because the card is damaged, the system performs a System...
  • Page 823 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-645 Board Mismatch n = filename selected A mismatch exists between the hardware components present on the current system and the hardware components reflected in the backup file. The restore is aborted.

  • Page 824: Memory Card

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Procedures Memory Card Page 3-646...
  • Page 825 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Page 4-1 Centralized Telephone Programming This chapter describes centralized telephone programming for the system manager and includes the following information: Accessing centralized telephone programming Programming the features available with this function Programming a single telephone Copying programmed features from one extension to another extension...

  • Page 826: Centralized Telephone Programming Introduction

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Introduction Page 4-2 Introduction Centralized telephone programming allows the system manager to program any feature that can be programmed by individual telephone users, or by the system operator, onto another telephone in the system.

  • Page 827: Access To Centralized Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Page 4-3 Access to Centralized Telephone Programming Access the Centralized Programming menu from the System Programming menu. Centralized programming is performed by selecting features from the display or by using programming codes.

  • Page 828: Program Extension

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-4 The sections that follow explain the use of menu selections for programming a single extension (Program Extension), and for using one extension as a template for programming several extensions of the same type (Copy Extension).
  • Page 829 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-5 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select Program Extension. Specify the extension you want to program. SP: “Entering an Extension” Save your entry. Select Select Start.
  • Page 830 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-6 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Select the line button to which you want to assign the feature. xxxx = extension entered in Step 2 Press the line button or function key that corresponds to your selection.
  • Page 831 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-7 Programming Codes Table 4–1 provides a quick reference to the programming codes for the system features. Table 4–1. Telephone Programming Codes Feature Programming Code Account Code Entry...
  • Page 832 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-8 Table 4–1. Telephone Programming Codes (Continued) Feature Programming Code Coverage Cover inside and outside calls Cover outside calls only Receiver buttons + ext.
  • Page 833 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-9 Table 4–1. Telephone Programming Codes (Continued) Feature Programming Code Group Calling ln-Queue Alarm button + calling group ext. no. Calling group supervisor Member available Member unavailable...
  • Page 834 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-10 Table 4–1. Telephone Programming Codes (Continued) Feature Programming Code † Night Service Notify + ext. no. Send + ext. no. Receive Park + park zone...
  • Page 835 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-11 Table 4–1. Telephone Programming Codes (Continued) Feature Programming Code Saved Number Dial Send/Remove Message + ext. no. †‡ Service Observing Signal (manual) + ext.
  • Page 836 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Program Extension Page 4-12 Using the List Feature Menu You can use the List Feature menu to select a feature, instead of using a programming code.

  • Page 837: Copy Extension

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 4-13 Copy Extension The system manager uses the copy extension feature to copy an extension’s programmed buttons (with some exceptions) to one or more extensions. The features are individually programmed on an extension, creating a template that can then be copied to other extensions in the system.
  • Page 838 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 4-14 Table 4–2. Features That Can Be Copied: All Telephones (Continued) Analog Analog and MLX Telephones Telephones Feature Telephones Only Only Coverage VMS Off Data Status...
  • Page 839 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 4-15 Table 4–2. Features That Can Be Copied: All Telephones (Continued) Analog Analog and MLX Telephones Telephones Feature Telephones Only Only Park Pickup: Group...

  • Page 840: Features That Can Be Copied: Direct-Line Consoles Only

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 4-16 Table 4–3 shows the operator features than can be copied for operator consoles. QCC features cannot be copied. Table 4–3. Features That Can Be Copied: Direct-Line Consoles Only Analog Direct-Line MLX Direct-Line...
  • Page 841 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Copy Extension Page 4-17 Console Display/Instructions Additional Information Save your entry. Select Specify the number of the extension to which you want to copy programming features.
  • Page 842 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-18 Feature Quick Reference The following feature descriptions provide a quick reference for using centralized telephone programming. Account Code Entry Assign a button for account code entry.
  • Page 843 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-19 Auto Answer All Assign a button to direct calls to an answering device when the user is not available.
  • Page 844 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-20 Automatic Line Selection Select the order in which the system makes outside lines available to the user. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Your current Automatic Line Selection table is deleted immediately after you...
  • Page 845 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-21 Callback With Automatic Callback turned on, the system retries calls to busy extensions or busy trunk pools. Assign a Selective Callback button to allow the system to retry calls to busy extensions or busy trunk pools on a call-by-call basis.
  • Page 846 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-22 Camp-On Assign a button to allow a user to complete a transfer to a busy extension. Summary: Camp-On Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones (except QCC) Mode...
  • Page 847 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-23 Summary: Coverage Inside Off/On This procedure allows or prevents Coverage of inside calls. Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones (except QCC) Mode Programmable by Users and system manager...
  • Page 848 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-24 Direct Voice Mail This feature allows one user to call another user’s voice mail, without ringing that user’s telephone. Summary: Direct Voice Mail Telephones Mode...
  • Page 849 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-25 Extension Status Assign a button to allow system operators or supervisors to monitor the status of extensions, and restrict use of telephones (hotel configuration) or change group members’...
  • Page 850 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-26 Forward Assign a button to activate the forwarding of a user’s calls to another extension or to an outside number. Summary: Forward Telephones Single-line, analog multiline, MLX telephones...
  • Page 851 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-27 Group Page Auto Dial Button Assign a button to allow the user to broadcast an announcement to individuals or groups using a speakerphone or loudspeaker.
  • Page 852 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-28 Summary: Headset Mute Assign a button to turn microphone operation on or off for both headset and handset. Telephones MLX telephones only Mode...
  • Page 853 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-29 Messaging Assign a button to allow users to send, receive, and post messages. Summary: Leave Message After Calling Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones Mode...
  • Page 854 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-30 Summary: Receiving Messages–Delete Telephones Analog multiline display only Mode Programmable by Users and system manager Programming Code Display Label Summary: Receiving Messages–Next Telephones Analog multiline display only...
  • Page 855 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-31 Night Service Assign a button to activate telephone operation after normal business hours. Summary: Night Service Telephones DLC operator only Mode Programmable by Operators and system manager...
  • Page 856 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-32 Park Zone Auto Dial Assign a button to allow DLC operators to hold a call at a specified extension or park zone.
  • Page 857 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-33 Pickup Assign buttons to allow users to answer calls that are ringing, parked, or on hold anywhere in the system. Summary: Pickup–General Use, Specific Extension, Specific Line Telephones...
  • Page 858 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-34 Reminder Service Assign buttons to allow the system to make calls automatically at preset times and cancel reminder service calls and operator reminder calls that were not answered. Summary: Set, Cancel, or Missed Reminder Service Telephones...
  • Page 859 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-35 Summary: Ring Timing Options Use this procedure to establish whether and how individual lines, or all lines, ring at a telephone.
  • Page 860 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-36 Saved Number Dial Assign a button to selectively save the last number dialed and call that number again without manually redialing. Summary: Saved Number Dial Telephones Analog multiline and MLX telephones...
  • Page 861 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-37 Service Observing Assign a button to allow a Service Observer to monitor calls at a specified station. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Service Observing may be subject to federal, state, or local laws, rules, or...
  • Page 862 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-38 System Access/Intercom Buttons Assign Intercom or System Access buttons on telephones. Summary: Assign System Access/Intercom Buttons Telephones Mode Intercom buttons Key, Behind Switch System Access buttons...
  • Page 863 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-39 System Speed Dial Assign a button to dial any 3-digit speed dial code. Summary: System Speed Dial Telephones Mode Programmable by Users and system manager...

  • Page 864: Feature Quick Reference

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Centralized Telephone Programming Feature Quick Reference Page 4-40...

  • Page 865: Customer Support Information

    In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-tree customer Helpline (1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline or your Lucent Technologies representative. Consultation charges may apply.

  • Page 866: Information

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information Page A-2 Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
  • Page 867 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information FCC Notification and Repair Information Page A-3 — The facility interface code (FIC) and service order code (SOC):  For tie line connection, the FIC is TL31M and the SOC is 9.0F. ...

  • Page 868: Installation And Operational Procedures

    FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, contact your authorized Lucent Technologies dealer or, in the USA only, contact the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) at 1 800 628-2888.

  • Page 869: Doc Notification And Repair Information

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information Page A-5 This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions occur when: —...

  • Page 870: Renseignements Sur La Notification Du Ministère Des Communications Du Canada Et La Réparation

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-6 CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician, as appropriate.
  • Page 871 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications du Canada Page A-7 AVERTISSEMENT: L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui- même;...
  • Page 872 PF: AS5USA-65646-PF-E REN: 1.5A MADE IN U.S.A. Use only Lucent Technologies manufactured MERLIN LEGEND circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units, as specified in WARNING: If equipment is used for the Installation Manual, in this product. There are no user out–of–building...

  • Page 873: Security Of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud

    Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that...

  • Page 874: Toll Fraud Prevention

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-10 To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system: Use an unpublished Remote Access number. Assign access codes randomly to users on a need-to-have basis, keeping a log of all authorized users and assigning one code to one person.
  • Page 875 . In any event, it is not advisable to give anyone access to network facilities or operators, or to dial a number at the request of the caller. Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Lucent Technologies BCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1 800 628-2888 (fraud intervention for...
  • Page 876 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-12 Customers should also take advantage of Lucent Technologies monitoring services and devices, such as the NetPROTECT family of fraud- ® detection services, CAS with HackerTracker , and CAT Terminal with Watchdog.
  • Page 877 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 878 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-14 Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are the following: Pooled facility (line/trunk) access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access.
  • Page 879 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-15 the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. The MERLIN MAIL MERLIN and MERLIN LEGEND MAIL Automated Attendant feature merely accesses the RCF feature in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.

  • Page 880: Other Security Hints

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-16 Other Security Hints Make sure that the Automated Attendant Selector Codes do not permit outside line selection. Multiple layers of security are always recommended to keep your system secure. Following are a number of measures and guidelines that can help you ensure the security of your communications system and voice messaging system.
  • Page 881 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-17 Educating Operators Operators and attendants need to be especially aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity. To defend against toll fraud, operators should follow the guidelines below: Establish procedures to counter social engineering .
  • Page 882 Change the access password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel. Disconnect the maintenance port when not in use. (However, this eliminates Lucent Technologies’ 24-hour maintenance surveillance capability and may result in additional maintenance costs.) Create a communications system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these suggestions: —...
  • Page 883 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-19 Choosing Passwords Passwords should be the maximum length allowed by the system. Passwords should be hard to guess and should not contain: All the same numbers (for example, 1111, 666666) Sequential characters (for example 123456) Numbers that can be associated with you or your business, such as your...

  • Page 884: Limited Warranty And Limitation Of Liability

    Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis.

  • Page 885: Remote Administration And Maintenance

    Page A-21 Limitation of Liability Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of: (1) the direct damages proven;...
  • Page 886 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A-22 To reduce the risk of unauthorized access through Remote Administration and Maintenance, please observe the following procedures: The System Administration and Maintenance capability of a Hybrid/PBX or Key system is protected by a password.

  • Page 887: Menu Hierarchy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Menu Hierarchy Page B-1 Menu Hierarchy The system programming menu hierarchy details the sequence of menu screens that appear when you select the system programming options. The choice of an option on the first menu screen leads to either a second menu screen or a data- entry screen.
  • Page 888 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Menu Hierarchy Page B-2...

  • Page 889: Led Displays

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 LED Displays Page C-1 LED Displays Table C–1 defines LED status on the MLX-20L console. LED status is indicated on the LEDs next to the 20 buttons below the display area on the system programming console.

  • Page 890: Line Or Trunk Feature Status For Mlx-20L Console

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 LED Displays Page C-2 Table C–1. Line or Trunk Feature Status for MLX-20L Console System LED Status* Programming Green LED Red LED Menu Option Option FLASHING ON FLASHING Lines Trunks Tie Lines...

  • Page 891: Telephone Feature Status For Dss Console Only

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 LED Displays Page C-3 Table C–2. Telephone Feature Status for DSS Console Only System Programming Red LED Status Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Extensions Account Forced Account Forced Account (FACE) Code Entry...
  • Page 892 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 LED Displays Page C-4 Table C–2. Telephone Feature Status for DSS Console Only (Continued) System Programming Red LED Status Menu Option Option FLASHING WINK Night Service Group Assign Telephone is in Telephone not in group group†...

  • Page 893: General Feature Use And Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Page D-1 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming This appendix contains information on the general use of features for the MLX, analog multiline, and single-line telephones.
  • Page 894 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Page D-2 Programmed Buttons Any unlabeled line button on multiline telephones can be programmed with a feature for one-touch activation.

  • Page 895: Telephone And Operator Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features Page D-3 Feature Codes Feature codes are 1-, 2-, and 3-digit codes that activate features. A feature code is used by first pressing the dedicated Feature button on MLX telephones, pressing a programmed Feature button on analog multiline telephones, or dialing on single-line telephones.
  • Page 896 Table D–1. Telephone and Operator Features 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. 82 Ã K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B code Account Code Entry &$(...
  • Page 897 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Call Waiting K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B '& Call Waiting Pickup &&! &&!
  • Page 898 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Extension Status Direct-Line Console &% &% + DSS Status Off K P B K P B K P B button &% &% + DSS Status 1...
  • Page 899 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Group Calling + calling ln-Queue Alarm K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B group ext.
  • Page 900 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Intercom buttons Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) ICOM Originate Only Change button type  ( Ring Voice Language Choice K P B K P B K P B K P B...
  • Page 901 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. "( "( Night Service K P B K P B K P B Notify K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B &$&...
  • Page 902 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Reminder Service K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B ' + time + Ã...
  • Page 903 2-Line MLX- MLX- MLX- MLX- 10/ Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display 10D/5D Line Multi. Saved Number Dial K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B "' "' + ext. no. Send/Remove K P B K P B...

  • Page 904: Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-12 Telephone Programming The following describes how to program features on MLX and analog multiline telephones. Because Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single-line telephone users can program, general programming instructions for single-line telephones are not provided.

  • Page 905: Programming Mlx-10 And Mlx-5 Nondisplay Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-13 Table D–2. Programming Analog Multiline Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the phone: insert the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the Note: Skip this step if the feature cover.

  • Page 906: Programming Mlx Telephones Using The Display

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-14 Table D–4. Programming MLX Telephones Using the Display Step Action Label the button to be Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by programmed.
  • Page 907 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-15 Table D–4. Programming MLX Telephones Using the Display (Continued) Step Action Select the feature. If the feature name is on the Press the button next to or below the name of the display: feature to be programmed.
  • Page 908 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-16 Table D–5. Programming MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Telephones Step Action Label the button to be Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by programmed.
  • Page 909 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page E-1 Button Diagrams This appendix contains the button diagrams for Hybrid/PBX, Key, and Behind Switch systems. SA Orig. Only Ring Ring Figure E–1. MLX-20L and MLX-28D Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode)

  • Page 910: Mlx-16Dp Telephone Button Diagram

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page E-2 Voice Ring Figure E–2. MLX-16DP Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Voice Ring Figure E–3. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode)

  • Page 911: Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page E-3 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Orig Only Voice Ring Figure E–4. Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode)

  • Page 912: Mlx-20L And Mlx-28D Telephone Button Diagram

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page E-4 Icom Voice Icom Ring Key Mode: Up to 8 personal line Behind Switch Mode: buttons are assigned One prime line button beginning at button 3. is assigned to button 3.

  • Page 913: Mlx 5- And 10-Button Telephone Button Diagram

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page E-5 Icom Voice Icom Ring Behind Switch Mode: One prime line is assigned to button 3 Figure E–7. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone Button Diagram (Key and Behind Switch Modes)

  • Page 914: Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Key And Behind Switch Modes

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page E-6 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Icom Voice Icom Ring Behind Switch Mode: Key Mode: One prime line button Up to 8 Personal line is assigned to button 3.

  • Page 915: Sample Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-1 Sample Reports This appendix includes samples of the print reports generated by the communications system. Table F–1 lists the system reports and the pages in this appendix where samples can be found.

  • Page 916: Sample Report Pages

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-2 Table F–1. Sample Report Pages ( Continued) For ... See ... PRI Information Report F–18 Remote Access (DISA) Information Report F–21 Operator Information Report F–22 Allowed Lists Report F–24...

  • Page 917: System Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-3 Table F–2. System Reports Menu Option Report Name Description Prints each of the reports available on the Print menu, from Note: With selected, four trunk information reports automatically print.
  • Page 918 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-4 Table F–2. System Reports (Continued) Menu Option Report Name Description Access to Allowed Lists Lists numbered 0–7. If the Allowed List is assigned to remote access users and barrier codes are used, barrier codes are numbered 0–16.
  • Page 919 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-5 Table F–2. System Reports (Continued) Menu Option Report Name Description Extension Information For each specified station (extension): type of equipment connected, features assigned, ESS supervisor status, and features assigned to each button.

  • Page 920: System Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports System Information Report Page F-6 System Information Report Print Menu Option: SYSTEM INFORMATION Current Date: 01/04/00 Current Time: 00:21:15 System : Mode AutoMaintBusy AutoBusyTie Hybrid/PBX Disable Disable...
  • Page 921 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports System Information Report Page F-7 System Information Report— Continued Slot # 1: 008 MLX Slot # 2: Slot # 3: Slot # 4: Slot # 5: 800 GS/LS Slot # 6: 008 GS/LS-MLX...

  • Page 922: Dial Plan Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-8 Dial Plan Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Pools; Telephone Paging Zones; Direct Group Calling Group; Lines/Trunks; Stations DIAL PLAN FOR POOLS POOL.# POOL.# POOL.#...
  • Page 923 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-9 Dial Plan Report—Continued DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS STN #: OPERATR STN #: STN #: STN #: EXT 13 STN #: EXT 14 STN #: STN #:...
  • Page 924 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-10 Dial Plan Report—Continued COMPLETE DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS AND ADJUNCTS ID #: 4000 7300 ID #: 4001 7301 ID #: 4002 7302 ID #:...

  • Page 925: Label Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Label Information Report Page F-11 Label Information Report Sections: Telephone Personal Directory; Posted Messages and Numbers LABEL INFORMATION Executive Telephone # Personal Directory Name Number Display Executive Telephone #...

  • Page 926: Tie Trunk Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Tie Trunk Information Report Page F-12 Tie Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: TIE TRUNK INFORMATION TRUNK Slot/Port : 14/ 1 TIE-PBX Direction: 2 Way E&M Signal: Type1S Dialtone : Remote...

  • Page 927: Did Trunk Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports DID Trunk Information Report Page F-13 DID Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS/PP Blk DiscTime Type ExpDig DelDig AddDig Signal InvDest 841 13/ 1 500ms...

  • Page 928: Gs/Ls Trunk Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports GS/LS Trunk Information Report Page F-14 GS/LS Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: GS/LS TRUNK INFORMATION SS/PP Type OutMode RelDisc ChannelUnit LS-ID Delay 2/ 1 Loop TouchTone 2/ 2...

  • Page 929: General Trunk Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports General Trunk Information Report Page F-15 General Trunk Information Report Print Menu Option: GENERAL TRUNK INFORMATION Trk SS/PP RemAccess Pool TlPrfx HldDisc Principal QCC Extern Extern Prty Oper Switch...

  • Page 930: Switch 56 Data Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Switch 56 Data Information Report Page F-16 Switch 56 Data Information Report Print Menu Option: Dial Plan Routing for Network Service Expected Digits: Digits to Delete: 0 Digits to Add: ss/pp Dirction...

  • Page 931: Ds1 Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports DS1 Information Report Page F-17 DS1 Information Report DS1 SLOT ATTRIBUTES Slot Type Format Supp Signal LineComp ClkSync Active Rob Bit Prim Loop Rob Bit None Local...

  • Page 932: Pri Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-18 PRI Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Network Selection, Special Service, Call-by-Call and Dial Plan Routing Tables; PRI Information NOTE: The B-Channels are printed in the order in which they are searched.
  • Page 933 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-19 PRI Information Report—Continued BchnlGrp #: Slot: TestTelNum: NtwkServ: Incoming Routing: ElecTandNtwk Route Directly to UDP Channel ID: 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Line...
  • Page 934 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-20 PRI Information Report—Continued Dial Plan Routing Table Entry Number: NtwkServ: Any service Any service Any service Expected Digits: Pattern to Match: Digits to Delete: Digits to Add: Entry Number:...

  • Page 935: Remote Access (Disa) Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Remote Access (DISA) Information Report Page F-21 Remote Access (DISA) Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: General Options; System Default Class of Restrictions (Non-TIE); System Default Class of Restrictions (TIE); Barrier Code Administration GENERAL OPTIONS (ACCESS CODE 889) Barrier Code required for Non-TIE DISA lines...

  • Page 936: Operator Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Operator Information Report Page F-22 Operator Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Operator Positions; General Options; DSS Options; QCC Operator Options: QCC Call Types OPERATOR POSITIONS PORT CALL ALERT...
  • Page 937 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Operator Information Report Page F-23 Operator Information Report— Continued QCC CALL TYPES: CALL TYPE PRIORITY OPERATORS ======================= ======== =================== Dial 0 Operator Follow Forward Unassigned DID Listed Directory Number Operator’s Extension...

  • Page 938: Allowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Allowed Lists Report Page F-24 Allowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Lists 1 through 7 ALLOWED LISTS List : Entry 0: ------ Entry 1: ------ Entry 2: ------...

  • Page 939: Access To Allowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Access to Allowed Lists Report Page F-25 Access to Allowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: ACCESS TO ALLOWED LISTS FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 & 18 MEAN TIE & NON-TIE RESTRICTIONS List STNS RACC...

  • Page 940: Disallowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Disallowed Lists Report Page F-26 Disallowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Lists 1 through 7 DISALLOWED LISTS List : Entry 0: ------------ Entry 1: ------------ Entry 2: ------------...

  • Page 941: Access To Disallowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Access to Disallowed Lists Report Page F-27 Access to Disallowed Lists Report Print Menu Option: ACCESS TO DISALLOWED LISTS FOR REMOTE ACCESS 17 & 18 MEAN TIE & NON-TIE RESTRICTIONS List STNS RACC...

  • Page 942: Automatic Route Selection Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Automatic Route Selection Report Page F-28 Automatic Route Selection Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Tables AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION ARS IS: ACTIVE ACCESS CODE: 9 TABLE 17: Default Toll Output Table Pool Absorb...

  • Page 943: Extension Directory Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Extension Directory Report Page F-29 Extension Directory Report Print Menu Option: EXTENSION DIRECTORY Port Ext # Label F H R M V R A 2 Port Ext # Label...

  • Page 944: System Directory Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports System Directory Report Page F-30 System Directory Report Print Menu Option: SYSTEM DIRECTORY Code Name Number Display ABC Company 555-9999 Jacques Smith 5551212 Travel Agency 912015556677...

  • Page 945: Group Paging Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Group Paging Report Page F-31 Group Paging Report Print Menu Option: GROUP PAGING Group # STNS Group # STNS...

  • Page 946: Extension Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Extension Information Report Page F-32 Extension Information Report Print Menu Option: plus extension number EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS/PP Type 1/ 1 MLX-20L + 1 DSS CTI Link Alarms: ACTIVE...
  • Page 947 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Extension Information Report Page F-33 Extension Information Report— Continued EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS/PP Type 1/ 1 MLX-20L + 1 DSS Button Blank Status None Button Blank Status None...

  • Page 948: Group Coverage Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Group Coverage Information Report Page F-34 Group Coverage Information Report Print Menu Option: GROUP COVERAGE INFORMATION Group # Senders 6802 6804 Group # Senders 47 6810 DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION Group #...

  • Page 949: Group Calling Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Group Calling Information Report Page F-35 Group Calling Information Report Print Menu Option: Sections: Each programmed group DIRECT GROUP CALLING INFORMATION Group # : 782 Group Type : AutoLogout Call Distribution Type : CIRCULAR...

  • Page 950: Night Service Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Night Service Information Report Page F-36 Night Service Information Report Print Menu Option: NIGHT SERVICE INFORMATION OPERATOR DGCG STNS LINES OPERATOR DGCG STNS LINES OPERATOR DGCG STNS...

  • Page 951: Group Call Pickup Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Group Call Pickup Report Page F-37 Group Call Pickup Report Print Menu Option: GROUP CALL PICKUP Group # STNS Group # STNS Group # STNS Group # STNS...

  • Page 952: Error Log Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Error Log Report Page F-38 Error Log Report Print Menu Option: ERROR LOG Last 30 System Errors: Message ss/pp First Last Code PRI SVC AUDIT TIMEOUT 00/00 01/08 00:00:53 7001...

  • Page 953: Authorization Code Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Authorization Code Information Report Page F-39 Authorization Code Information Report Print Menu Option: SMDR Option for the Account Code Field is Home Extension Extension Authorization Code 3124 1357921...

  • Page 954: Bri Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports BRI Information Report Page F-40 BRI Information Report Print Menu Option: BRI INFORMATION Flexible Timers: T200 = 1000 ms T203 = 33 sec T303 = 4 sec T305 = 30 sec T308 = 4 sec Fixed Timers and Counters: T202 = 2 sec T309 = 90 sec...

  • Page 955: Non-Local Dial Plan Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Non-Local Dial Plan Report Page F-41 Non-Local Dial Plan Report Print Menu Option: (Release 6.0 and later systems only) Sections: Ranges; Patterns Range Ptn Dgt Range Ptn Dgt Range...

  • Page 956: Service Observing Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Sample Reports Service Observing Information Report Page F-42 Service Observing Information Report Print Menu Option: (Release 6.1 and later systems only) SERVICE OBSERVING INFORMATION GROUP # : 1 Service Observer: 1110 Give Warning Tone: No...

  • Page 957: G General System Programming Sequence

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General System Programming Sequence Page G-1 General System Programming Sequence This appendix lists the basic procedures, in the order in which they must be performed, to program a new system. In some instances, you may need to rearrange the system planning forms to match this order.

  • Page 958: Basic System Operating Conditions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General System Programming Sequence Basic System Operating Conditions Page G-2 Basic System Operating Conditions Select the system programming position. Select the system language. More Select the system mode. Enable Automatic Maintenance Busy.

  • Page 959: Identify System Operator Positions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General System Programming Sequence Identify System Operator Positions Page G-3 Identify System Operator Positions Identify QCC system operator positions. Identify DLC system operator positions. Lines and Trunks Specify type of trunk on 400 or 800 GL/LS module.

  • Page 960: Complex Lines

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General System Programming Sequence Complex Lines Page G-4 Complex Lines Program DS1 trunks. Program tie lines. Program DID trunks. Program PRI trunks. Program BRI trunks. Telephones Many system managers prefer to program auxiliary equipment before programming telephones.

  • Page 961: Auxiliary Equipment

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General System Programming Sequence Auxiliary Equipment Page G-5 Auxiliary Equipment Program Music On Hold. Program loudspeaker paging. Program a fax port. Identify the jack used for maintenance alarms. Program voice mail and automated attendant.
  • Page 962 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 General System Programming Sequence Print Reports Page G-6...

  • Page 963: Programming Special Characters

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Special Characters Single-Line Telephones Page H-1 Programming Special Characters This appendix explains the special characters used in dialing sequences for numbers that are dialed automatically, such as on Auto Dial buttons. The characters allowed depend on the type of telephone.

  • Page 964: Special Characters For Analog Multiline Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Special Characters Analog Multiline Telephones Page H-2 Analog Multiline Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 965: Special Characters For Mlx-10 And Mlx-5

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Special Characters MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Page H-3 MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 966: Special Characters For Mlx Display Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Programming Special Characters MLX Display Telephones Page H-4 MLX Display Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character in a dialing sequence after a dial-out code to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.
  • Page 967 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-1 Glossary Italics The use of italics in the glossary denotes multiple usage of the italicized text throughout the glossary. Numerics Digital information carried by two B-channels for better 2B data performance and quality;...
  • Page 968 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-2 (alternate mark inversion) Line coding format in which a binary one is represented by a positive or negative pulse, a binary zero is represented by no line signal, and subsequent binary ones must alternate in polarity;...
  • Page 969 Message Drop, Voice Mail, and, optionally, Fax Attendant System for use with the system. Automated IS II/III , MERLIN LEGEND Mail , and Lucent Technologies Attendant Attendant application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department, an extension, or the system operator.
  • Page 970 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-4 Password used to limit access to the Remote Access barrier code feature of the system. In a private network , it is especially important that barrier codes be required for all types of remote access.
  • Page 971 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-5 board A module, for example, 100D or 408 MLX GS/LS, that allows you to connect lines/trunks and extensions to the communications system. board assignment System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) procedure for assigning line/trunk and extension modules to slots on the control unit.
  • Page 972 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-6 (common-channel signaling) Signaling in which one channel of a group of channels carries signaling information for each of the remaining channels, permitting each of the remaining channels to be used to nearly full capacity.
  • Page 973 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-7 (Call Management System) DOS-based application that simulates the actions of a system operator by answering and distributing calls. Also produces reports for call analysis.
  • Page 974 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-8 (class of restriction) Various types of restrictions that can be assigned to remote access trunks or barrier codes. These restrictions consist of calling restrictions, ARS Facility Restriction Levels ( FRL s), Allowed Lists, Disallowed Lists, and Automatic Callback queuing.
  • Page 975 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-9 data workstation Special type of extension where data communications take place; includes DTE and DCE ; sometimes a telephone is also part of a data workstation. (data communications equipment) Equipment such as modems or ISDN terminal adapters used to establish, maintain, and terminate a connection between the system...
  • Page 976 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-10 (Direct Inward Dial) Service that transmits from the telephone company central office and routes incoming calls directly to the called extension, calling group , or outgoing line/trunk pool , bypassing the system operator.
  • Page 977 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-11 door answering Device connected to a basic telephone jack and used at an unit unattended extension or front desk. (disk operating system) drop-and-insert A device that can be installed between systems connected equipment by tandem PRI trunks or T1-emulated tandem tie trunks to...
  • Page 978 (193 bits) in a 24-frame extended superframe. (Electronic Switching System) Class of central office ( CO ) switching systems developed by Lucent Technologies in which the control functions are performed principally by electronic data processors operating under the direction of a stored program.
  • Page 979 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-13 Fax Attendant Fax handling and processing application available with System AUDIX Voice Power . (Federal Communications Commission) feature Function or service provided by the system. feature code Code entered on a dialpad to activate a feature.
  • Page 980 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-14 glare Condition that occurs when a user tries to call out on a loop-start line at the same time that another call arrives on the same line.
  • Page 981 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-15 (Incoming Call Line Identification) See Caller ID . ICLID ICOM buttons (intercom buttons) Telephone buttons that provide access to inside system lines for calling other extensions or receiving calls from them.
  • Page 982 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-16 IS II/III (Integrated Solution II or Integrated Solution III) Set of UNIX System-based applications that augments and provides additional services using the system. IS II and III are no longer available.
  • Page 983 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-17 (light-emitting diode) Semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied; light on a telephone. line Connection between extensions within the communications system; often, however, used synonymously with trunk .
  • Page 984 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-18 Magic on Hold A Lucent Technologies Music On Hold enhancement that promotes a company’s products or services. Mbps (megabits per second) Megacom The AT&T tariffed digital WATS offering for outward calling.
  • Page 985 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-19 Pair, or group of pairs, of modems and data modules with modem pool interconnected RS-232 interfaces that converts digital signals to analog, or analog signals to digital, thereby allowing users with ISDN terminal adapter data stations to communicate with users who have analog modem data stations .
  • Page 986 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-20 NI-1 BRI (National Integrated Services Digital Network 1 Basic Rate Interface) A type of digital facility that carries the equivalent of three lines. Two are called B-channels and provide voice and data communications services.
  • Page 987 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-21 The addition of a bit to a bit string so that the total number parity of ones is odd or even, used to detect and correct transmission errors.
  • Page 988 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-22 (Primary Rate Interface) Standard interface that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems. As used in North America, it provides twenty- three 64-kbps B-channels for voice and/or data and one 16- kbps D-channel , which carries multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels.
  • Page 989 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-23 (random-access memory) Computer memory in which an individual byte or range of bytes can be addressed and read or changed without affecting other parts of memory. read-only memory See ROM .
  • Page 990 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-24 screen pop Refers to a computer-telephony software application that takes caller information (for example, provided by Caller ID service), queries a database, and displays a screen with information about the caller onto a user’s PC screen.
  • Page 991 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-25 See SAA . Supplemental Alert Adapter switch See communications system . Switched 56 DS1 Switched 56 service is an end-to-end digital, 56-kbps, service full duplex, synchronous, circuit-switched service offering.
  • Page 992 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-26 T1-emulated data A T1 tie trunk programmed for S56DATA for use by data calls at speeds up to 56 kbps. These trunks may be used for tandem and non-tandem operation.
  • Page 993 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-27 TSAPI Telephony Services Application Programming Interface. An application programming interface that allows computer telephony applications to be used. TSAPI is supported by the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0.
  • Page 994 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-28 (alternating-current voltage) (direct-current voltage) (voice messaging interface) An enhanced tip/ring port. videoconferencing System application that allows face-to-face meetings, with system voice and video, to occur between individuals or groups. This application requires high-speed data transmission facilities.
  • Page 995 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Index Page IN-1 Index Numerics 008 MLX module 1–4 008 OPT module 1–75 012 module 1–75 016 T/R module ringing frequency 3–57 1 + 7-digit dialing requirements 3–530 100D module clock synchronization...
  • Page 996 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Index Page IN-2 Assigning Allowed Lists 3–492 Disallowed Lists 3–497 Intercom buttons 3–278 System Access (SA) buttons 3–278 trunks or pools 3–268 AUDIX Voice Power 1–77 Authorization Codes 1–72 3–334...
  • Page 997 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Index Page IN-3 Board renumbering 2–31 3–9 Boards 2–31 inspect 2–32 null 2–31 phantom 2–31 programming in surrogate mode 2–31 types 2–32 Browse 2–35 Built-in speakerphone (BIS) 3–268 3–286 Call...
  • Page 998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Index Page IN-4 Console MLX-20L 2–21 system programming 2–21 window language 2–41 Control unit cover 1–75 Conversion aborted 2–37 overview 2–36 part of upgrade procedure 2–60 procedure 2–36 requirements for restore...
  • Page 999 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Index Page IN-5 Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facilities channel service unit (CSU) 3–137 clock synchronization 3–85 frame format 3–105 3–128 line compensation 3–134 overview 3–105 signaling mode 3–132 type of facility 3–105...
  • Page 1000 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 System Programming Guide 555-661-111 August 1998 Index Page IN-6 Extension Summary Report 1–63 Extensions Automatic Route Selection (ARS) restriction level 3–322 copy 2–67 directory 3–596 forced idle 2–51 language 3–313 status 3–466 Facility Grade of Service Report 1–63 Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs)

This manual is also suitable for:

Merlin legend

Table of Contents